Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS, AIM
and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks
or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark
used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product,
service and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001: 2008 companies.
For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, Contact ANSYS, Inc.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xiii
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xv
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xvii
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xix
User's Guide
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Preface
This preface discusses how to use this manual:
• Starting CFD-Post (p. 3) describes how to start CFD-Post and the environment variables that affect how
CFD-Post operates.
• CFD-Post 3D Viewer (p. 75) describes how to use the CFD-Post 3D Viewer.
• CFD-Post File Menu (p. 91) describes the functionality available from the File menu and the file types that
CFD-Post supports.
• CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences) (p. 135) describes the functionality available from the Edit
menu, such as customizing CFD-Post by setting your preferences on the Options dialog box.
• CFD-Post Session Menu (p. 145) describes how to record and replay session files. (Session files contain a record
of the commands issued during a CFD-Post session.)
• CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 147) describes how to create new objects (such as locators, tables, charts, and so
on), variables, and expressions by using the Insert menu.
• CFD-Post Tools Menu (p. 249) describes how to use the CFD-Post Tools menu, which offers access to
quantitative analysis utilities, the animation editor and the timestep selector.
• Turbo Workspace (p. 293) describes how to use the CFD-Post Turbo workspace, which improves and speeds
up post-processing for turbomachinery simulations.
• CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post (p. 327) describes how to use the CFX Command Language (CCL)
and the CFX Expression Language (CEL).
• CFX Expression Language (CEL) describes the CFX Expression Language (CEL) in detail.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxi
Preface
• Line Interface Mode describes running CFD-Post in line-interface mode (that is, without using a user interface,
but with a viewer that shows objects you create on the command line) and in batch mode (where a viewer
is not provided and you cannot enter commands at a command prompt).
• Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category describes how to convert variable names in a Fluent file to CFX
variable names for use in CFD-Post.
2. Document Conventions
This section describes the conventions used in this document to distinguish between text, filenames,
system messages, and input that you need to type.
User Input
Input to be typed verbatim is shown using the following convention:
mkdir /usr/local/cfx
Input Substitution
Input substitution is shown using the following convention:
you should actually type cfx5post -batch and substitute a batch-file name for <batch_file>.
Optional Arguments
Optional arguments are shown using square brackets:
Here the argument -verbose is optional, but you must specify a suitable filename.
Long Commands
Commands that are too long to display on a printed page are shown with “\” characters at the ends of in-
termediate lines:
cfx5export -cgns [-boundary] [-corrected] [-C] \
[-domain <number>] [-geometry] [-help] [-name <file>] \
[-summary] [-timestep <number>] [-user <level>] [-norotate] \
[-boundaries-as-nodes|-boundaries-as-faces] [-verbose] <file>
On a Linux system, you may type the “\” characters, pressing Enter after each. However, on a Windows
machine you must enter the whole command without the “\” characters; continue typing if the
command is too long to fit in the command prompt window and press Enter only at the end of
the complete command.
<CFDPOSTROOT>
The installation directory for CFD-Post, which differs depending on whether it installed with ANSYS CFX.
The default installation directory for CFD-Post without ANSYS CFX is:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v180\CFD-Post
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Document Conventions
<os> refers to the short form of the name that CFX uses to identify the operating system in question.
<os> will generally be used for directory names where the contents of the directory depend on
the operating system but do not depend on the release of the operating system or on the processor
type. Wherever you see <os> in the text you should substitute with the operating system name.
The correct value can be determined by running:
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfx5info -os
<arch> refers to the long form of the name that CFX uses to identify the system architecture in
question. <arch> will generally be used for directory names where the contents of the directory
depend on the operating system and on the release of the operating system or the processor type.
Wherever you see <arch> in the text you should substitute the appropriate value for your system,
which can be determined by running the command:
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfx5info -arch
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxiii
Preface
3. Accessing Help
You can access the ANSYS CFX help in the following ways:
• Select the appropriate command from the Help menu of the ANSYS CFX Launcher or CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver
Manager, or CFD-Post. The help will open in the ANSYS Help Viewer.
• Click a feature of the ANSYS CFX interface to make it active and, with the mouse pointer over the feature,
press the F1 key for context-sensitive help (that is, the help opens at the appropriate page for the feature
under the mouse pointer). Not every area of the interface supports context-sensitive help.
For information on using the ANSYS Help Viewer, see Using Help in the Using Help.
For further information about tutorials and documentation on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://
support.ansys.com/docinfo.
The following table lists the PDF files for ANSYS CFD-Post:
4. Contact Information
Technical Support for ANSYS, Inc. products is provided either by ANSYS, Inc. directly or by one of our
certified ANSYS Support Providers. Please check with the ANSYS Support Coordinator (ASC) at your
company to determine who provides support for your company, or go to www.ansys.com and select
Contacts> Contacts and Locations.
If your support is provided by ANSYS, Inc. directly, Technical Support can be accessed quickly and effi-
ciently from the ANSYS Customer Portal, which is available from the ANSYS Website (www.ansys.com)
under Support > Customer Portal. The direct URL is: support.ansys.com.
One of the many useful features of the Customer Portal is the Knowledge Resources Search, which can
be found on the Home page of the Customer Portal. To use this feature, enter relevant text (error
message, etc.) in the Knowledge Resources Search box and click the magnifying glass icon. These
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contact Information
Knowledge Resources provide solutions and guidance on how to resolve installation and licensing issues
quickly.
NORTH AMERICA
All ANSYS Products except Esterel, Apache and Reaction Design products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Toll-Free Telephone: 1.800.711.7199 (Please have your Customer or Contact ID ready.)
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
GERMANY
ANSYS Mechanical Products
Telephone: +49 (0) 8092 7005-55 (CADFEM)
Email: support@cadfem.de
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
National Toll-Free Telephone: (Please have your Customer or Contact ID ready.)
German language: 0800 181 8499
English language: 0800 181 1565
Austria: 0800 297 835
Switzerland: 0800 564 318
International Telephone: (Please have your Customer or Contact ID ready.)
German language: +49 6151 152 9981
English language: +49 6151 152 9982
Email: support-germany@ansys.com
UNITED KINGDOM
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Telephone: Please have your Customer or Contact ID ready.
UK: 0800 048 0462
Republic of Ireland: 1800 065 6642
Outside UK: +44 1235 420130
Email: support-uk@ansys.com
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
JAPAN
CFX and Mechanical Products
Telephone: +81-3-5324-7305
Email:
Mechanical: japan-ansys-support@ansys.com
Fluent: japan-fluent-support@ansys.com;
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxv
Preface
CFX: japan-cfx-support@ansys.com;
Polyflow: japan-polyflow-support@ansys.com;
Icepak
Telephone: +81-3-5324-7444
Email: japan-icepak-support@ansys.com
Licensing and Installation
Email: japan-license-support@ansys.com
INDIA
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Telephone: +91 1 800 209 3475 (toll free) or +91 20 6654 3000 (toll) (Please have your Customer or
Contact ID ready.)
FRANCE
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Toll-Free Telephone: +33 (0) 800 919 225 Toll Number: +33 (0) 170 489 087 (Please have your Customer
or Contact ID ready.)
Email: support-france@ansys.com
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
BELGIUM
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Toll-Free Telephone: (0) 800 777 83 Toll Number: +32 2 620 0152 (Please have your Customer or Contact
ID ready.)
Email: support-benelux@ansys.com
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
SWEDEN
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Telephone: +46 (0) 10 516 49 00
Email: support-sweden@ansys.com
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contact Information
Spain: Toll-Free Telephone: 900 933 407 Toll Number: +34 9178 78350 (Please have your Customer or
Contact ID ready.)
Portugal: Toll-Free Telephone: 800 880 513 (Portugal)
Email: support-spain@ansys.com, support-portugal@ansys.com
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
ITALY
All ANSYS Products
Web: Go to the ANSYS Customer Portal (http://support.ansys.com) and select the appropriate option.
Toll-Free Telephone: 800 789 531 Toll Number: +39 02 00621386 (Please have your Customer or Contact
ID ready.)
Email: support-italy@ansys.com
Support for University customers is provided only through the ANSYS Customer Portal.
K0REA
Telephone: 82-2-3441-5000
CHINA
Toll-Free Telephone: 400 819 8999 Toll Number: +86 10 82861715
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxvii
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: Overview of CFD-Post
CFD-Post is a flexible, state-of-the-art postprocessor. It is designed to enable easy visualization and
quantitative analysis of the results of CFD simulations.
• A graphical user interface that includes a viewer pane in which all graphical output from CFD-Post is plotted.
For details, see CFD-Post Graphical Interface (p. 13) and CFD-Post 3D Viewer (p. 75).
• Support for a variety of graphical and geometric objects used to create postprocessing plots, to visualize
the mesh, and to define locations for quantitative calculation. For details, see CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 147).
You can perform a variety of exact quantitative calculations over objects; for details, see Quantitative
Calculations in the Command Editor Dialog Box.
• Postprocessing capability for turbomachinery applications. For details, see Turbo Workspace (p. 293).
• Standard interactive viewer controls (rotate, zoom, pan, zoom box), multiple viewports, stored views/figures.
• Extensive reports, including charting (XY, time plots). For details, see Report (p. 33).
• Reads CFX-Solver results files (*.res), CFX-Solver input files (*.def), CFX-Mesh files (*.gtm), CFX-Solver
Backup results files (*.bak), CFX-Solver Error results files (*.res, *.err), ANSYS files (*.rst, *.rth,
*.rmg, *.inn), ANSYS Meshing files (*.cmdb, *.dsdb), CFX-4 dump files (*.d*mp*), CFX-TASCflow files
(*.lun, *.grd, *.rso), CGNS files (*.cgns, *.cgs), and Fluent files (*.cas, *.dat, *.msh, *.cdat).
The supported file types are described in File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post (p. 115).
Note
CFX-Solver results files are necessary to access some of the quantitative functionality that
CFD-Post can provide.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Overview of CFD-Post
• Supports transient data, including moving mesh. Node locations are repositioned based on the position for
the current timestep.
• Supports macros through an embedded user interface (see Macro Calculator (p. 266)).
• Outputs to PostScript, JPEG, PNG, various bitmap formats, and VRM, as well as animation (keyframe) and
MPEG file output. For details, see Quick Animation (p. 254).
Note
Note: The 3D viewer in CFX/CFD-Post/TurboGrid does not support the buttons of a 3Dcon-
nexion device. However it might be possible to use the software provided with the device
to configure the buttons so that they send key sequences that trigger 3D viewer actions.
Power Syntax
Power Syntax provides integration of the Perl programming language with CCL to enable the creation of
advanced subroutines. For details, see Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX.
Batch Mode
CFD-Post can be run in batch mode (often using a session file as the basis for a series of actions that will
be executed). For details, see Running in Batch Mode (p. 9).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 2: Starting CFD-Post
This chapter describes how to start CFD-Post and the environment variables that affect how CFD-Post
operates:
2.1. Starting CFD-Post with the ANSYS CFX Launcher
2.2. Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line
2.3. Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables
2.4. Running in Batch Mode
Note
You can also start CFD-Post from other ANSYS products; for details, refer to the documentation
that comes with those products.
• Access various other tools, including a command window that enables you to run ANSYS CFX utilities without
having to type the path to the executable.
• On Windows:
– From the Start menu, select All Programs > ANSYS 18.0 > Fluid Dynamics > CFX 18.0.
– In a DOS window that has its path set up correctly to run ANSYS CFX, enter: cfx5
If the path has not been set, you need to type the full path to the cfx5 command; typically this
is:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v180\CFX\bin\cfx5.exe
• On Linux, open a terminal window that has its path set up to run ANSYS CFX and enter: cfx5
If the path has not been set, you need to type the full path to the cfx5 command; typically this is:
/usr/ansys_inc/v180/CFX/bin/cfx5.exe
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
Starting CFD-Post
When the launcher starts, set your working directory and click the CFD-Post icon.
Note
The launcher automatically searches for CFD-Post and other ANSYS products, including the
license manager.
ANSYS Workbench accepts commas as decimal delimiters, but translates these to periods when
passing data to CFD-Post.
Note
CFD-Post will not function correctly on a Linux system with the environment variable
"LC_ALL" set to a locale which uses a comma delimiter. The environment variable "LANG"
can usually be used to set the locale instead.
• You may want to specify certain command-line arguments so that CFD-Post starts up in a particular config-
uration. For details, see Optional Command Line Arguments (p. 5).
• CFX contains some utilities (for example, a parameter editor) that can be run only from the command line.
• If you are having problems with CFD-Post, you may be able to get a more detailed error message by starting
it from the command line than you would get if you started it from the launcher. When you start CFD-Post
from the command line, any error messages produced are written to the command-line window.
Windows <CFDPOSTROOT>\bin\cfdpost
Linux <CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Starting CFD-Post from the Command Line
Argument Description
-batch <file Starts CFD-Post in batch mode, running the session file you enter as an
name.cse> argument.
[<results file
1>] [<results
file 2> ...]
-gui Starts CFD-Post in graphical user interface (GUI) mode (the default).
-line Starts CFD-Post in line interface (CFD-Post command line) mode. This
interface will start a command line prompt where you can type CCL
commands. Typically you would create a session file using the user
interface mode, then make modifications to that file as required.
To start a CCL section, type “e”. When done typing CCL commands, type
“.e” to process the CCL.
The ability to write and execute CCL is also available in user interface
mode through the Command Editor. For details, see Overview of
Command Actions.
-remote <host> -remote specifies a remote host to run on.
-port <number>
-viewerport -port specifies the port number for user interface-engine
<number> communication.
This option also requires the host machine to be running CFD-Post with
the -server option.
-report <tem Starts CFD-Post in batch mode, loads the results files, then produces a
plate> [-name report and exits.
<report name>]
[-outdir <dir Here, <template> may be one of the following:
name>] [<res
ults file 1>] • The word “auto”. If you use the word “auto” for a template, then CFD-Post
will attempt to find the most suitable built-in template.
[<results file
2> ...] • The name of a registered template, wrapped in quotes. Register a template
by running CFD-Post in user interface mode. For details, see Report
Templates (p. 37).
• The name of a state or session file. If you provide a state file as a template,
the results file indicated in the state file, if there is one, will be used when
no results file name is provided on the command line.
-graphics For Linux only: specify the graphics system (options are ogl and mesa).
Alternative form:
-gr
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
Starting CFD-Post
Argument Description
-local-root Specify the file path of the CFD-Post installation.
<path>
-t <file.cst> Start CFD-Post and load the state file <file.cst>.
Alternative form:
-state
<file.cst>
-results Start CFD-Post and load the results file <file.res>.
<file.res>
Alternative
form:-res
<file.res>
-monitor Start CFD-Post and begin monitoring the solution in progress.
<file.dir>
-multiconfig Select a multi-configuration load option to control how you load a
single|separ multi-configuration (.mres) file or a results file (.res) that contains a
ate|last run history (that is, a file that was produced from a definition file that
had its initial values specified from a results file from a previous run and
Alternative form:-m saved to the results file that you are loading). Choose:
single|separ
ate|last • Single Case to load all configurations of a multi-configuration run as a single
case, or all of the results history from a results file that contains a run history.
In either case, only one set of results will appear in the viewer, but you can
use the timestep selector to move between results. This option is not fully
supported.
Alternative
form:-session
<file.cse>
-v Display a summary of the currently set environment variables.
Alternative
form:-verbose
-h Display a full list of all the possible arguments with short descriptions.
Alternative
form:-help
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setting CFD-Post Operation Through Environment Variables
Environment Description/Usage
Variable
CFX Allows user-defined macros to load at start-up.
POST_USER_MAC
ROS CFXPOST_USER_MACROS='macro1, macro2, '
If the macros contain user interface commands, the appropriate panels will
be added to the Macro Evaluator user interface.
Example:
CFXPOST_USER_MACROS='myMacro1.cse, /home/bob/mac
ros/myMacro3.cse'
CFX Enables adjusting the zero-theta location in single-domain cases.
POST_ZERO_THETA
Linux: CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA='x,y,z'
Windows: CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA=x,y,z
This will be used in turbo cases to determine at which position the Theta
variable will be equal to zero. By default, CFD-Post will set Theta such that
the Theta values in the first encountered domain range from zero to some
positive value.
CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA='1,0,0.5'
CFXPOST_ZERO_THETA=1,0,0.5
CFX_USER_IM Enables you to display a custom logo image in the viewer.
AGE_DATA CFX_USER_IMAGE_DATA='filepath
xLoc yLoc xAttach yAttach scale
alphaR alphaG alphaB transparency'
Only ppm, png, jpeg, and 24-bit bmp files are currently supported.
xLoc, yLoc: horizontal and vertical location of the image in the viewer (0-1)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
Starting CFD-Post
Environment Description/Usage
Variable
If set to none, yLoc is used.
Example:
cameraZ: Z location of the camera (must be less than –1.0; –5.0 is optimum)
Smaller numbers bring the camera closer to the scene (and also widen the
camera angle), larger numbers move it further.
mode: 0 = normal, 1 = left eye, 2 = right eye, 3 = left/right eye (two viewports),
4 = right/left (two viewports), 5 = stereo
Example:
x,y,z: specifies a direction vector (in the global coordinate system) about
which to apply a rotation to the background image
Example:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Running in Batch Mode
Environment Description/Usage
Variable
If you start CFD-Post with the mountain scenery background, the background
will appear upright when the Y axis is “up”. You may find that the geometry
of your CFD mesh has its “top” side pointing in the X axis direction. You can
rotate the background image so that it appears upright when the X axis is
“up” by rotating the image about the Z axis by -90 degrees, as follows:
CFX_BACKGROUND_ROTATE='0 0 1 -90'
When running in batch mode, a Viewer is not provided and you cannot enter commands at a command
prompt. Instead, commands are issued via a CFD-Post session file (*.cse), the name of which is specified
when executing the command to start batch mode. The session file can be created using a text editor,
or, more easily, by recording a session while running in line interface or user interface mode. You can
leave a session file recording while you quit from user interface or line interface mode to write the
>quit command to a session file. Alternatively, you can use a text editor to add this command to the
end of the session file.
When launching CFD-Post on a remote Linux machine (though X, Exceed, and so on), the DISPLAY
variable must be set to a valid X display before running in batch mode. The display will typically be
your local Windows, or Linux machine. The remote machine must have permission to connect to the
display (for example, by use of the xhost command if the X display is on a Linux machine).
To run in batch mode, execute one of the following commands at the command prompt:
You can include the name of a results file in your session file, which is described in the example below.
However, you can also pass the name of a results file and a session to CFD-Post from the command
line. This allows you to apply a generic session file to a series of different results files. To launch CFD-
Post in batch file mode, load a results file and execute the statements in a session file using one of the
following commands:
To load multiple files, you may list the filenames at the end. For example, fluid.res solid.rst flu-
id1.res
The purpose of this example is for demonstration only. You will deal with only three results files in this
case, and it would be faster to produce the output by using the graphical user interface. However, these
features can be useful in situations where a large number of results files need to be processed at once.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
Starting CFD-Post
In order to carry out this procedure, you will make use of session files, power syntax and the Command
Editor dialog box. You could use the results from any file by making the appropriate substitutions in
the following example.
1. Place three results files (<resfile1>, <resfile2>, <resfile3>) in your working directory. For this
example, in all three results files the location 0, 0, 0 must be in the solution domain.
a. Start CFD-Post and select File > Load Results. Select the results file and click Open.
d. Select Session > Start Recording from the main menu to begin recording the session file commands.
e. Select Insert > Location > Point and accept the default name Point 1.
You will now use Power Syntax to find the value of pressure at Point 1, and print it to the
command line. In addition to printing the value of pressure, it would be useful to know the
name of the results file. You will make use of the DATA READER object to find the name of
the current results file.
Note
If you copy the text above into the Command Editor, ensure that the exclamation
points are at the beginning of lines.
j. Check the terminal window to make sure the command worked as desired.
k. Select Session > Stop Recording from the main menu to stop recording the session file.
3. This completes the first part of the example. You may want to close down CFD-Post at this time.
4. You can now run the session file on any number of results files using the following command:
<CFDPOSTROOT>/bin/cfdpost -batch batchtest.cse <resfile>
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Running in Batch Mode
To load multiple files, you can list the filenames at the end of the command. For example:
cfdpost -batch batchtest.cse <resfile1> <resfile2> <resfile3>
For a very large number of results files, a simple script can be used to pass filenames as command line
arguments. As an example, this C shell script would pass arguments as results file names to the CFD-
Post command line:
#!/bin/csh
foreach file ($argv)
<CFDPOSTROOT>/cfdpost -batch batchtest.cse $file
end
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 3: CFD-Post Graphical Interface
The CFD-Post interface contains the following areas: the menu bar, the toolbar, the workspace area,
and the viewer area.
When CFD-Post starts, the Outline workspace area and the 3D Viewer are displayed. The top area of
the Outline workspace is the tree view and the bottom area is the details view (the details view is pop-
ulated only after you edit an item, as described in Details Views (p. 16)).
The viewer displays an outline of the geometry and other graphic objects. In addition to the mouse,
you can use icons from the viewer toolbar (along the top of the viewer) to manipulate the view.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
The width of the workspace can be adjusted by dragging its right border to the left or right. The width
of the viewer is updated to accommodate the new size of the workspace. The dividing line between
the tree view and details view can be dragged vertically to re-size the windows. You may want to do
this if the details view contains a large amount of information.
The details of all the possible objects and associated parameters that can be defined in CFD-Post are
described in the CFD-Post .ccl file available with the installation.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Graphical Objects
• Right-clicking in the viewer (not applicable for all object types). In many cases, this is the most convenient
way to create locators (such as planes). For details, see CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 78).
You can change the visibility settings for a group of objects by first selecting a subgroup of objects
(using mouse clicks while holding down Ctrl (for multiple, independent selections) or Shift (to drag
over a range of selections)), and then right-clicking on the group and using the appropriate shortcut
menu command (for example, Hide or Show). For details, see CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 78).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
When multiple viewports are used, the state of each check box is maintained separately for each
viewport.
Tip
You control the number and layout of viewports with the viewport icon in the
viewer's toolbar.
Command Description
New (or Insert) Inserts an object. In the details view for the new object, the Locations setting, or
similar setting as applicable, is preset to the name(s) of the selected object(s).
Edit Edits the selected object in a details view.a
Edit in Command Edits the selected object(s) in the Command Editor dialog boxa. For details, see
Editor Command Editor (p. 291).
Duplicate Creates a new object of the same type as, and with the same settings as, the
selected object.
Delete Deletes the selected object(s).
a
An expression that is set as an input parameter in ANSYS Workbench cannot be edited in CFX-Pre or CFD-Post (because the results
of such edits are not passed to ANSYS Workbench) and will be grayed out. However, the expression can be declared to no longer be
an input parameter or it can be deleted.
• Right-clicking an object in the tree view and selecting Edit from the shortcut menu
• Highlighting an object in the tree view and clicking Edit from the shortcut menu
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
• Right-clicking on an object in the Viewer and selecting Edit from the shortcut menu
You use the Details view to define the properties of an object. The Details view contains one or more
tabs, depending on the type of object being defined.
2. Click the Enter Expression icon that appears beside the field. This enables the field to accept an expression
name.
3. Either enter an expression definition directly, or type the name of an existing expression. You must ensure
that the expression evaluates to a value having appropriate units for the property that uses the expression.
For CFX components in ANSYS Workbench, any CEL expression can be made into a parameterized CEL
expression by defining it as a Workbench input parameter. You can do this by creating an expression
and parameterizing it by right-clicking it in the Expression editor. You can then use that expression as
the value of a property.
You can change a property from being specified by a Workbench input parameter. However, the corres-
ponding CEL expression persists and can be managed by the Expression editor.
• Apply applies the information contained within all the tabs of an editor.
• Cancel and Close both close the editor without applying or saving any changes.
• Reset returns the settings for the object to those stored in the database for all the tabs. The settings are
stored in the database each time the Apply button is clicked.
• Defaults restores the system default settings for all the tabs of the edited object.
After starting CFD-Post and loading a results file, several special objects will exist in the Outline work-
space. All of these special objects can have some of their properties edited, but the objects themselves
cannot be created or deleted using CFD-Post (without using CCL commands). These objects are described
in the following sections:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Objects that do not exist after loading a results file are described in CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 147).
Shortcuts available to the tree view are described in Outline Tree View Shortcuts (p. 18).
Some of the settings and buttons in a details view of the Outline workspace are common for different
object types; these are described in Outline Details View (p. 19).
The following table shows commands that are specific to the Outline tree view. For a list of shortcuts
that appear in most tree views, see Common Tree View Shortcuts (p. 16).
Command Description
Show Makes the selected objects visible in the viewer.
Hide Makes the selected objects invisible in the viewer.
Hide All Makes all objects, except the wireframe object, invisible in
the viewer.
Refresh Preview Refreshes the report. For details, see Refreshing the
Report (p. 47).
Load ‘<template>’ Loads the registered template having the name indicated
template by <template>. For details, see Report Templates (p. 37).
Report Templates Allows you to select a report template. For details, see
Report Templates (p. 37).
Add to Report Sets the selected report objects to appear in the report the
next time the report is generated.
Remove from Report Sets the selected report objects to not appear in the report
the next time the report is generated.
Add All to Report Sets all report objects to appear in the report the next time
the report is generated.
Move Up Moves the selected objects up one level in the report so
as to appear closer to the beginning of the report in relation
to the other report objects.
Move Down Moves the selected objects down one level in the report
so as to appear closer to the end of the report in relation
to the other report objects.
Show in Separate Displays the selected chart in its own window.
Window
Replace results file Replaces the selected results file with another results file
while keeping the state. This is the recommended
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Command Description
procedure; reloading the results file through the Load
Results panel may not recover the state completely, in
particular when Turbo Post is initialized. Note that the Re-
place results file function will keep the original case name
even though the results file has changed.
To select the domain, pick a domain name from the drop-down Domains menu. To define the object
in more than one domain, you can type in the names of the domains separated by commas or click
When more than one domain has been used, most plotting functions can be applied to the entire
computational domain, or to a specific named domain.
The Color details tab enables you to view and/or edit the properties of the tree view's Display
Properties and Defaults > Color Maps definitions; System colors are view-only but Custom
colors can be edited.
To choose a color, click the Color selector icon to the right of the Color option and select one of
the available colors. Alternatively, click the color bar itself to cycle through ten common colors quickly.
Use the left and right mouse buttons to cycle in opposite directions.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
The list of variables contains User Level 1 variables. For a full list of variables, click More variables
For isosurface and vector plots, the Use Plot Variable option is also available. This sets the variable
used to color your plot to the same as that used to define it.
3.4.2.2.3. Range
Range enables you to plot using the global, local, or a user specified range of a variable. The range affects
the variation of color used when plotting the object in the viewer. The lowest values of a variable in
the selected range are shown in blue in the viewer; the highest values are shown in red.
• The Global range option uses the variable values from the results in all domains (regardless of the domains
selected on the Geometry tab) and all time steps (when applicable) to determine the minimum and max-
imum values.
• The Local range option uses only the variable values on the current object at the current time step to set
the maximum and minimum range values. This option is useful to use the full color range on an object.
• The User Specified range option enables you to specify your own maximum and minimum range values.
You can use this to concentrate the full color range into a specific variable range.
You should not select the Local Range option when coloring an isosurface or turbo surface with the
variable used to define it. In this case, the Local Range would be zero by definition, and the plot
would highlight only round-off errors.
3.4.2.2.4. Hybrid/Conservative
Select whether the object you want to plot will be based on hybrid or conservative values. For details,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
• Rainbow 6 uses an extension of the standard Rainbow map from blue (minimum) to magenta (maximum).
• Zebra creates six contours over the specified range of values. Between each pair of contour lines, the color
scale varies from white (minimum) to black and through to white (maximum) again. The Zebra map can
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
be used to show areas where the gradient of a variable changes most rapidly with a higher resolution (five
times greater) than the standard Greyscale color map
The CFD-Post Color Map editor enables you to define and name a set of colors (a color map) that you
can then apply to an object by using that object's Color tab.
• From an object's Color tab (when the Mode is set to Variable), click the icon beside the Color Map
field and select Insert, Edit, or Duplicate.
• From the Outline view under Display Properties and Defaults > Color Maps, select a System or Custom
color map, right-click, and select either Insert, Edit, or Duplicate.
A System color map can be set as the default, but otherwise cannot be edited directly. However,
you can duplicate a System color map and use that as a basis for a Custom color map (which will
be completely editable).
Depending on how you access the Color Map editor, it may appear as a dialog box or as a details view.
To learn how to use the Color Map editor, see Color Map Command (p. 219).
For example, a section of an object that lies outside the computational domain will not have any variable
value.
Clicking the Color selector icon to the right of this box allows you to change the undefined color.
Alternatively, click the color bar itself to cycle through ten common colors quickly. Values written to
the results file as zeros are colored as such and will not be undefined. For example, consider results
files containing Yplus/Wall Shear values away from a wall boundary.
3.4.2.3.1. Symbol
Selects the style of the symbol to be displayed.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Note
• Flat Shading: Each element is colored a constant color. Color interpolation is not used across or between
elements.
• Smooth Shading: Color interpolation is applied that results in color variation across an element based on
the color of surrounding elements.
• Draw as Lines: This option draws lines but uses the color settings defined on the Color tab. The color settings
that are applied to the lines use Smooth Shading. You must use the Screen Capture feature to print an
image or create an animation containing lines drawn using this option. (See Animation Options Dialog
Box (p. 259) for details on the Screen Capture feature.)
Note
Optionally, you can edit the face you want to show as lines to disable Show Faces and to
enable Show Mesh Lines. The resulting display will be similar to Draw as Lines, but in
constant-color mode only.
• Draw as Points: This option draws points at the intersection of each line, using the color scheme defined
on the Color tab. You must use the Screen Capture feature to print an image containing this option.
Note
Face Culling affects only printouts performed using use Screen Capture method.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Toggle Face Culling (removal) of the front or back faces of the polygons that form the graphic object.
This allows you to clear visibility for element faces of objects that either face outwards (front) or inwards
(back). Domain boundaries always have a normal vector that points outwards from the domain. The
two sides of a thin surface therefore have normal vectors that point towards each other.
• Selecting Front clears visibility for all outward-facing element faces. This would, for example, clear visibility
for one side of a plane or the outward facing elements of a cylinder locator. When applied to a volume object,
the first layer of element faces that point outwards are rendered invisible. You will also generally need to
use face culling when viewing values on thin surface boundaries, which are defined using a wall boundary
on two 2D regions that occupy the same spatial location.
If you want to plot a variable on a thin surface, you will need to select Front Face culling for both
2D regions that make up the thin surface to view the plot correctly. As shown by the two previous
diagrams, viewing only the back faces means that the data for the inward facing surfaces is always
visible.
• Selecting Back clears visibility for inward-facing element faces (the faces on the opposite side to the normal
vector). When applied to volume objects, the effect of back culling is not always visible in the viewer because
the object elements that face outward obscure the culled faces. It can, however, reduce the render time
when further actions are performed on the object. The effect of this would be most noticeable for large
volume objects. In the same way as for Front Face culling, it clears visibility of one side of surface locators.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Default sets the line to CFD-Post default color scheme (set using Options dialog box in Edit menu).
User Specified allows you to pick the color. For details, see Show Mesh Lines: Line Color (p. 24).
Line color can be changed by clicking the Color selector icon to the right of the Color box and se-
lecting a color. Alternatively, click the color bar itself to cycle through ten common colors quickly. Use
the left and right mouse buttons to cycle in opposite directions.
Enable Blend to blend the texture with the object color specified from the Color tab.
Blend allows the colors of the texture to combine with the basic color of the object. For example, if a
white object is given the texture Metal, the object looks like silver. If the basic color of the object is
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
orange, the object looks like copper. With the Blend feature turned off, the basic color of the object
has no effect and colors depends only on the texture.
An Image File (either a bitmap or ppm file) must be specified. The dimensions of the image, in pixels,
should be powers of two. If the texture image has a number of rows not equal to a power of two, some
rows are removed (with an even distribution) until the number remaining is a power of two. The same
is true for the number of columns. For example, an image with dimensions 65 by 130 is reduced to an
image 64 by 128 before it is applied (the file will not be changed, though).
There are two basic kinds of texture mapping available; textures can either move with the object, as if
painted on, or textures can “slide” across objects, producing a “shiny metal” effect. The latter kind of
texture mapping is activated by turning on the Sphere-Map feature.
• Position: Controls the position of the mapped image relative to the object.
• Direction: Controls the direction in which the texture is stamped on the object.
The texture appears undistorted when the object is viewed in this direction.
• Scale: Controls the size of the mapped texture relative to the object.
• Angle: Controls the texture image orientation about the axis specified by Direction.
Note that the brick pattern was applied in the direction of the Y axis, which is roughly going from the
lower-left corner to the upper-right corner of the figure. The texture is applied to all faces of the object
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
(locator) ignoring the Y coordinate. This results in the texture becoming smeared in the specified Dir-
ection.
To avoid this, textures can be applied to smaller locators (that is, ones that cover only a portion of the
whole object). The Direction setting can then be specified using a direction approximately perpendic-
ular to each of the smaller surfaces. Smaller locators can be found in the tree view (for example, under
Regions).
These settings specify an axis of rotation. For details, see Method (p. 215).
3.4.2.5.1.2. Angle
The Angle setting specifies the angle of rotation about the axis. For details, see Angle (p. 216).
Note
If you apply scaling to one or more domains in a multidomain case (including any case that
has multiple domains due to the use of data instancing), the resulting domains will generally
not be located correctly relative to each other.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Tip
To see the full path to the case file, hover the mouse pointer over the case name.
A case branch contains all domains, subdomains, boundaries, and Mesh Regions contained in the
corresponding results file.
Double-clicking on the case branch name displays the View tab in the details view. Select the Apply
Translation check box to move the object in the Viewer. For details, see Apply Translation Check
Box (p. 216).
The Instancing tab for a domain is the same as the Instancing tab for a turbo component (see Instancing
Tab (p. 299)) and similar to the Definition tab for an Instance Transform object (see Instance Transform:
Definition Tab (p. 214)). (The Definition tab for an Instance Transform object is different in that its Axis
Definition settings and Instance Definition settings cannot be set from a results file.)
Any viewable object that is associated with one or more domains is, by default, affected by a change
to the instancing information (as defined on the Instancing tab) of each associated domain, because:
• By default, such an object uses the default transform to control graphical instancing.
• By default, the default transform has the Instancing Info From Domain option selected.
• The Instancing Info From Domain option causes the graphical instancing information to be taken from
each domain (as defined on the Instancing tab) that is associated with the object.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Data instancing alters the geometric representation of the domain mesh and the solution data associated
with it. The mesh and solution data that were read from the results file are “expanded” by the number
of instances specified such that the domain and its solution data then appear to encompass the original
and instanced meshes. Such instancing of the solution data is carried out by using the Fourier coefficients
that are stored in the results file.
In this documentation, the term “expanded domain” is used to refer to the domain after instancing has
been applied.
Vector, contour, streamline, Solution data is available throughout the expanded domain. A
particle track, volume plot defined on an expanded domain will be displayed where
rendering appropriate in the expanded domain. For example, streamlines
will be drawn as continuous lines when continuing from one
instance of the original mesh to the next.
Charts (such as Blade These objects act as if the domain has been expanded. Charts
Loading, Circumferential, Hub that involve circumferential averaging (that is, Hub to Shroud,
Inlet to Outlet, Meridional) use averaging over only the existing
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Note
When loading a results file via the Load Results File dialog box, the Construct Variables
From Fourier Coefficients option must be selected in order for CFD-Post to read the Fourier
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
coefficient data, which makes data instancing possible. For details, see Load Results Com-
mand (p. 91).
Note
Global ranges apply to only the set of data instances that you have generated and for only
the time steps that you have loaded. Creating and deleting data instances, or loading other
time steps, can cause the global range to change.
Note
Some quantities are time independent and therefore are unchanged for each data instance.
For example, the global range of a contour plot of Pressure varies according to the number
of data instances but the global range of a contour plot of Pressure.trnavg is unaffected
by the number of data instances.
The Boundary and Subdomain object types are defined during preprocessing and created in CFD-Post
when a file is loaded. You cannot create additional boundary or subdomain objects during postprocessing,
or delete the existing ones.
A boundary object exists for each boundary condition defined in the results file. Any mesh regions that
were not specifically assigned a boundary condition appear in a default boundary object for each domain.
If you have a complex geometry where many mesh regions are assigned to the default boundary con-
ditions, it may be worth defining named boundary conditions for some of the regions when they are
created, even though you still apply the default wall boundary condition to these named regions. You
will then have convenient boundary objects created in CFD-Post upon which you can view variables
when you come to view the results.
You can edit both the Color and Render properties of Boundary and Subdomain objects. For details,
see
You can edit both the Color and Render properties of User Surface objects. For details, see:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
3.4.3.4. Spray
The Spray object only becomes available after loading a Forte results file. Spray objects share many of
the common features found in CFD-Post, as well some unique features.
Reduction Type enables you to reduce the number of particles present in the Spray object. There are
two options.
Since, by default, particles generated in a Spray object will have different sizes, you can select Constant
to make all particles respect the Symbol Size. If Particle Diameter is selected, the particles will maintain
their relative sizes while still scaling with Symbol Size.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
• User-defined locators
You can define a variety of locators, such as points, lines, planes, and volumes; for details, see Location
Submenu (p. 148).
• Transforms
Instance transforms are used to specify how an object should be drawn multiple times. CFD-Post can
create instance transforms using rotation, translation, and reflection; for details, see Instance Transform
Command (p. 214).
• Legends
Legends can be displayed in the viewer to show the relationship between colors and values for the
locators you insert; for details, see Legend Command (p. 210).
• Wireframe
The Wireframe object contains the surface mesh for your geometry; for details, see Wireframe (p. 32).
3.4.4.1. Wireframe
The Wireframe object contains the surface mesh for your geometry and is created as a default object
when you load a file into CFD-Post. You can change how much of the surface mesh you want to see
by altering the Edge Angle (see the following section), as well as the line thickness and color.
You toggle the visibility of the wireframe on and off by clicking on the Wireframe check box in the
Outline tree view. To change the way the wireframe displays, double-click Wireframe.
Note
• Domains specifies the domains on which the wireframe is displayed. The option All Domains refers to
all domains except immersed solid domains. To include all immersed solid domains, add All Immersed
Solid Domains to the selection.
• Show Surface Mesh controls whether you see edges and surfaces, or only edges, when the wireframe is
visible.
• Edge Angle determines how much of the wireframe is drawn. The edge angle is the angle between one
edge of a mesh face and its neighboring face. Setting an edge angle in CFD-Post defines a minimum angle
for drawing parts of the surface mesh. For example, if an edge angle of 30 degrees is chosen, any edges
shared by faces with an angle between them of 30 degrees or more is drawn. 30 degrees is the default edge
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
angle; if you want to see more of the wireframe, reduce the edge angle. To change the wireframe’s edge
angle, set Edge Angle to a new value.
• Color Mode determines the color of the lines in the wireframe. To change the wireframe’s line color, set
Color Mode to User Specified and click the color bar to select a new color.
• Line Width determines the thickness of the lines in the wireframe. To change the wireframe’s line width,
set Line Width to a new value.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
3.4.5. Report
CFD-Post automatically makes available a report of the output of your simulation. You can control the
contents of the report in the Outline workspace, see the available sections of the report in the Report
Viewer, add new sections in the Comment Viewer, and publish the report in HTML or in plain text
form.
Here is an example of a report that uses the generic template; if you have a RES file loaded in CFD-Post,
you can see a similar report by clicking on the Report Viewer tab at the bottom of the Viewer area.
Note
The sample report shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 34), Figure 3.3: A Sample
Report, Part 2 (p. 35), and Figure 3.4: A Sample Report, Part 3 (p. 36) is taken from a Re-
port.html file, much like the one that you generate when you click the Publish button
.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
A report is defined by the Report object and the objects stored under it. The Report object, like
other objects, can be saved to, and restored from, a state file. For details, see File Types Used and Pro-
duced by CFD-Post (p. 115). Only one Report object exists in a CFD-Post session.
Note
The Title Page option controls the inclusion of the logo, title, dates, and Table of Contents
sections.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
After making changes, click Apply and Refresh Preview to see the results in the Report Viewer.
The other report pages control detailed information about the mesh, physics, and solution. Again, after
making changes, click Apply and Refresh Preview to see the results in the Report Viewer.
1. In the Comment Viewer toolbar, click New Comment to ready the Comment Viewer for editing.
3. Set the level of the heading in the Level field (use "1" for new sections; "2" for subsections, and so on).
4. Type your text in the large, white text-entry field (HTML code is not accepted as it is generated automat-
ically).
5. When your new section is complete, select its name in the Outline tree view under Report, then press
Ctrl+Up Arrow (or Ctrl+Down Arrow) to move the new section in the report hierarchy.
6. To see how the report will look, right-click Report and select Refresh Preview. The updated report appears
in the Report Viewer. To publish the report (that is, to make the report available in a file that others can
see), right-click Report and select Publish.
7. In the Publish Reports dialog box, you can choose where to save the report. You can also choose to
produce CVF files that can be viewed in the ANSYS CFD-Viewer or Microsoft PowerPoint (with the ANSYS
CFD-Viewer installed). The ANSYS CFD-Viewer installer executable is in the CFX\viewer directory in
your product installation.
If you click More Options, you can change the type of graphics files and charts used and their
size.
8. To save the report, click OK. The report is written to the file you specified.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
• The shortcut menu that appears when you right-click the Report object.
In the same places, there is a Report Templates command that invokes the Report Templates dialog
box. This dialog box allows you to:
To do this:
1. Click Add template on the Report Templates dialog box to invoke the Template Properties dialog
box.
2. Select a state or session file that contains a report; alternatively, you can choose to use the current state
of CFD-Post, and provide a file name to which to save the template.
3. Provide a name and description for the template. You cannot use the name of an existing template.
4. If you are loading a state or session file, and the file name does not end in .cst or .cse, set the Exe-
cution setting to either State or Session, as applicable.
To do this:
1. Click Edit Properties on the Report Templates dialog box to invoke the Template Properties dialog
box.
2. View and/or edit the name, description, and path to the template file, as applicable. You can edit the
properties for templates that were added, but not the standard templates.
You can delete only the templates that were added. To do this:
2. Click Delete .
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
bladerow domain separately into CFD-Post using the domain selector. (To enable the domain selector,
click the Edit > Options menu, select Files and select the Show domain selector before load option.)
Important
• Turbo reports attempt to auto-initialize Turbo mode. However if auto-initialization fails, you must
initialize Turbo mode manually and re-run the turbo report.
• CFD-Post cannot automatically detect a solution that is "360 Case Without Periodics", so you
need to set this manually.
• Turbo report templates are not designed for multifile usage or comparison mode. In these cases:
– User charts that contain local variables will not have plots showing the differences in compar-
ison mode.
– There will be only one picture of the meridional view of the blades (corresponding to the first
loaded results file).
• Because transient blade row results are different in each passage, Turbo Reports are not designed
for transient blade row cases, and results may not be what is expected. Plots in Turbo reports
that appear to show multiple passages actually show copies of the first passage and not expanded
passages. In other words, the turbo report tool follows the same behavior of any other solution
method; that is, it makes an instanced copy of the first passage and plots the variables there.
These are the variables required for all Release 18.0 turbo reports:
• Density
• Force X
• Force Y
• Force Z
• Pressure
• Total Pressure
• Rotation Velocity
• Velocity
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
• Velocity Circumferential
• Velocity Meridional
Note
If all of the turbo components in the results file are 'stationary', then variables having names
ending with 'in Stn Frame' are not required.
• Density
• Static Pressure
• Total Pressure
• X Velocity
• Y Velocity
• Z Velocity
In addition to the variables mentioned above, the following variables are required for compressible
flow reports:
CFX Variables Required for all Release 18.0 Compressible Flow Turbo Reports
• Temperature
• Total Temperature
• Static Enthalpy
• Total Enthalpy
• Total Density
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
• Rothalpy
• Static Entropy
• Mach Number
Fluent Variables Required for all Release 18.0 Compressible Flow Turbo Reports
• Static Temperature
• Total Temperature
• Enthalpy
• Total Enthalpy
• Rothalpy
• Entropy
• Mach Number
When variables are missing, lines in the turbo report tables that depend on these variables will be
missing.
3.4.5.4.1.1. Procedures for Using Turbo Reports when Turbomachinery Data is Missing
Results files from Fluent (and from some other sources) will not have all the turbomachinery data that
CFD-Post requires. For turbo results files that lack data about the number of passages, you must do the
following:
1. For Fluent files, prior to loading a turbo report template, create a new variable that the report expects
(but which is not available from Fluent files):
a. From the toolbar, click Variable . The Insert Variable dialog box appears.
b. In the Name field, type Rotation Velocity and click OK. The Details view for Rotation Velocity
appears.
c. In the Expression field, type Radius * abs(omega) / 1 [rad] and click Apply. This expression
calculates the angular speed (in units of length per unit time) as a product of the local radius and
the rotational speed.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
2. When you load a turbo report for a case that is missing some variables, an error dialog box appears that
describes warnings and errors. Generally this means that some rows in the turbo report will not appear.
Turbo reports for Fluent files will not display information about absolute Mach number. This causes
charts of Mach number to display only the relative Mach number.
3. For any results file that is missing the number of passages (such as Fluent files and CFX results files not
set up using the Turbo Mode in CFX-Pre), after you load the turbo report template, do the following for
each domain:
a. A <domain_name> Instance Transform appears in the Outline view under User Locations and
Plots. Prior to viewing the report, double-click this name to edit the instance transform. In the # of
Passages field, ensure that the number of passages matches the number of passages in the domain.
If you enter a new number, click Apply.
b. On the Expressions tab, double-click on the expression domain_name Components in 360 to edit
it. Match the definition to the number of components in the domain. If you enter a new number,
click Apply.
4. In the Report Viewer, click Refresh to ensure that the contents are updated.
In the Computed Results table, any values that are shown as “N/A” means that the necessary scalar
variables for computing these values were missing from the results file. This might happen if the solution
was run using an older version of CFX, or if some of the scalar variables were manually disabled.
The report templates are CFD-Post session files located in the CFX install under the etc/PostReports
directory. You can edit these reports or make new versions to add to the list of report templates. The
following table shows the correspondence between the machine type, the flow type settings, and the
report selection.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Several reports support postprocessing of results that have multiple components/blade rows.
The reports attempt to group the components into stages; you can control how the stages are formed
by editing the report session file. The new reports include:
AxialCompressorReport.cse
Report template for axial compressors
CentrifugalCompressorReport.cse
Report template for centrifugal compressors
CompressibleTurbineReport.cse
Report template for compressible flow turbines.
HydraulicTurbineReport.cse
Report template for incompressible flow turbines.
PumpReport.cse
Report template for incompressible flow pumps.
1. Specify the settings for the report that are contained in the Report object.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
2. Specify the settings for the title page that are contained in the Title Page object.
5. Control which objects get included in the report, and the order in which they are included.
For details, see Controlling the Content in the Report (p. 47).
You may refresh the report at any time to see the effect of changes you make to the report settings
and content. The report appears on the Report Viewer tab.
You can publish a report so that it can be loaded into a third-party browser or editor. For details, see
Publishing the Report (p. 47).
Choose the image format in which you want the image files to be saved.
Choose the size for figures that appear in the report. There are preset sizes, and an option for setting
a custom size.
If you set Figure Size to Custom, set the figure width and height in pixels.
3.4.5.5.1.4. Figures: Fit All Figures in the Viewport Before Generation Check Box
When this option is selected, each figure is produced with the view centered and the zoom level set
automatically.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
Choose the image format in which you want the chart files to be saved.
Choose the size for charts that are saved as part of the report. There are options that specify preset
sizes, an option for using the same size as figures, and an option for setting a custom size.
If you set Chart Size to Custom, set the chart width and height in pixels.
The Custom Logo check box determines whether or not a custom logo is included in the title page.
The logo must be available in a file of compatible format.
The Custom Logo setting indicates the image file to use for the custom logo.
The ANSYS Logo check box determines whether or not the ANSYS logo is included in the title page.
The ANSYS logo is shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 34).
3.4.5.5.2.4. Title
3.4.5.5.2.5. Author
The Author setting holds the name of the author of the report.
The Current Date check box determines whether or not the date and time are included in the title
page.
The Table of Contents check box determines whether or not a table of contents is included in the title
page. An example is shown in Figure 3.2: A Sample Report, Part 1 (p. 34).
Each entry in the table of contents is an active link to the corresponding section of the report. To follow
a link, click the link using the left mouse button.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
3.4.5.5.2.8. Table of Contents Check Box: Captions in Table of Contents Check Box
The Captions in Table of Contents check box controls the level of detail in the entries in the table of
contents. When this check box is selected, the entries in the table of contents that link to objects in
the report contain the titles of the objects.
Note
A results file from a multi-configuration run contains the monitor data for the initial values
case as well as for the case for which the RES file applies. When the case is read, the data
from the entire dataset is amalgamated, and the force, torque, mass flow, and momentum
data is extracted. This may cause the list of boundary conditions in the Outline tree view to
differ from the lists in the Solution Report > Boundary Flow and Force and Torque tables.
However, any such differences will not lead to incorrect results.
Note
The units of the values displayed in a Solution Report object are based on the solution
units used by CFX-Solver, rather than those selected in CFD-Post.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Outline Workspace
• Tables
• Charts
• Comments
• Figures
Such objects are listed beneath the Report object in the tree view.
You can control the order of Report objects by selecting one or more, then right-clicking on the se-
lection and using the Move Up and Move Down shortcut menu commands as necessary. You can also
press Ctrl+Up Arrow and Ctrl+Down Arrow to move selected items.
• Right-click the Report object, or any of the report objects under it, then select Refresh Preview from the
shortcut menu.
• Click the Refresh Preview button in the details view for the Report object, or any of the report objects
under it that have this button.
Note
The first time you visit the Report Viewer tab after loading a results file, the report will be
refreshed automatically.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
settings as appropriate, and click OK. You can also access the same dialog box by doing any of the
following:
• Right-click the Report object, or any of the report objects under it, then select Publish.
3.4.5.5.11.1. Format
• HTML
• Text
The Text option causes the report to be written in a plain text format.
3.4.5.5.11.2. File
Set File to the file name to use for saving the report.
Selecting the Save images in separate directory check box causes all image files to be put in a directory
that is beside the main output file.
3.4.5.5.11.4. Generate CFD Viewer files (CVF) for Figures Check Box
When this option is selected, each figure is saved to a 3D image file in addition to the 2D image file
that is normally saved. The 3D image file has an extension of cvf, and can be viewed in the ANSYS
CFD-Viewer or Microsoft PowerPoint (with the ANSYS CFD-Viewer installed).
The ANSYS CFD-Viewer installer executable is in the CFX\viewer directory in your product installation.
The More Options button opens the Publish Options dialog box. The Publish Options dialog box offers
the same settings as the Report object, and overrides the latter for the purpose of publishing the report.
Note
The Publish Options dialog box settings will be overwritten with the settings of the Report
object if you change or otherwise apply the settings of the latter.
To learn how customize color maps, see Color Map Command (p. 219).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Variables Workspace
• The Derived folder contains variables that are automatically generated by CFD-Post. The Vortex Core
subfolder contains any variables related to vortex cores. For details on vortex cores, see Vortex Core Region
in the CFD-Post User's Guide.
• The Difference folder contains differences in variables between two cases. The Difference folder
becomes available only after Case Comparison has been enabled through the Outline workspace. For
details on Case Comparison, see Case Comparison in the CFD-Post User's Guide.
• The Geometric folder contains mesh statistics such as element volume, edge length ratio and minimum
face angle.
• The Solution folder contains variables generated by solver applications. The subfolders Residuals and
Corrections contain variables related to solution quality. The subfolders Fourier Coefficients
and Transient Statistics contain variables related to transient cases.
Note
When the results file from a transient blade row case is loaded, CFD-Post creates all the
variables with available Fourier Coefficients. The timestep selector defaults to the last time
step in the simulation. Fourier Coefficient vector variables are available only for the non-
expanded domain and are not oriented correctly.
• The Turbo folder contains variables related to turbomachinery, particularly those involving cylindrical co-
ordinates. The variable list in the Turbo folder expands if you initialize turbo components through the
Turbo workspace. For details on the Turbo workspace, see Turbo Workspace (p. 293).
• The User Defined folder contains any new variables created by the user. For details, see User Vari-
ables (p. 52).
• The User Locations and Plots folder contains variables related to streamlines, particle tracks and
user locations from external files.
Variables prefixed by a particular material type are grouped in subfolders. If the variable belongs to
another subfolder, such as Vortex Core or Fourier Coefficients, the material type takes
priority. For example, gas.velocity.helicity appears under Derived > Gas > Vortex Core.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Command Description
All to Conservative Makes all variables assume conservative values. For details,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
All to Hybrid Makes all variables assume hybrid values. For details, see
Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
Calculate Velocity Calculates velocity components using the global rotation
Components axis. This can also be done in the Turbo workspace. For
details, see Calculate Velocity Components (p. 318).
• Right-click the variable, then choose Edit from the shortcut menu.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Variables Workspace
Note
These settings override the global units setting (defined in the Options dialog box, accessible
from the Edit menu).
This affects any dependent variables and expressions as well. For details, see Hybrid and Conser-
vative Variable Values.
Use this to undo changes if you have not yet clicked Apply.
One reason for modifying the variables in a results file is to modify the initial conditions for a new
solver run. In this case, you must modify the principal variable for each affected equation.
In CFX-Pre, in most cases, the principal variable for a given equation is the same as the variable used
to specify initial conditions, but there are some exceptions, as shown in the table below:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
For example, to initialize the mass fractions equation in CFX-Pre, you would set Mass Fraction. In
order to modify the initial conditions for the same equation in a results file, you would set Conservat
ive Mass Fraction instead.
Note
• For the thermal energy and total energy equations, you must set Temperature as well as the
principal variable.
• When overwriting the mesh Total Mesh Displacement, the locations of the mesh nodes
in CFD-Post will not be affected, only the variable values.
• For transient blade row cases, solution variables will not be overwritten because the variables
displayed in CFD-Post are not directly loaded from the results file, but are reconstructed from
the available Fourier coefficients stored in the results file.
To obtain sensible plots when using these variables, use them to color only boundary objects. If, for
example, you try to color a slice plane through the center of the geometry with one of these variables,
you will see a large area of color that is meaningless; only at the very edges of the geometry will there
be useful coloration.
For boundary-value-only variables, only hybrid values exist (as they are undefined away from a boundary).
There are three basic types of user variables, depending on the value of the Method setting:
• Expression
The Expression user variable is defined by one or three expressions, depending on whether the
Scalar or Vector option is selected. You can enter new expressions or select existing expressions.
For details, see Expressions Workspace (p. 54).
If Calculate Global Range is selected then, after you click Apply, the range data is computed and
displayed in the details view. If Calculate Global Range is not selected when you click Apply then
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Variables Workspace
you still have the option of selecting this option and clicking Apply again in order to compute and
display the range data.
For an Expression user variable, and any user variable that depends on it, the Boundary Data setting
(which can normally be set to Hybrid or Conservative) is not applicable. Whenever the defining ex-
pression is evaluated, the values of any underlying independent variables are hybrid and/or conser-
vative in accordance with the Boundary Data settings (at the time of evaluation) of those independent
variables. The defining expression of an Expression user variable is automatically re-evaluated
whenever you change the Boundary Data setting of any underlying independent variable.
• Frozen Copy
At the time you click Apply, the Frozen Copy user variable is defined by copying the current values
of an existing scalar variable (which is specified by the Copy From setting). Hybrid and conservative
values are copied as available. If both hybrid and conservative values are available, then after you
click Apply to create the Frozen Copy user variable, the Boundary Data setting becomes available,
enabling you to select between hybrid or conservative values; your selection affects all objects and
expressions that depend on the Frozen Copy user variable. Toggling between hybrid and conser-
vative selects data within the copy. It does not cause data to be copied again from the Copy From
variable.
The Frozen Copy user variable values remain constant even if the variable from which the copy
was made subsequently changes in any way, for example, by switching to a different time step.
After you create a Frozen Copy user variable, changing the Copy From variable and clicking Apply
causes the Frozen Copy user variable to be redefined at that time.
• Gradient
The Gradient user variable is defined as a vector variable that represents the gradient of the selected
scalar variable, or the gradient of the magnitude of the selected vector variable.
If both hybrid and conservative values are available for the selected variable, then after you click
Apply to create the Gradient user variable, the Boundary Data setting becomes available, enabling
you to select between hybrid or conservative values; your selection affects all objects and expressions
that depend on the Gradient user variable.
Note
• You cannot create a variable with the same name as an existing expression or object.
• To preserve Frozen Copy user variables between sessions, you can use the New Session
Command (p. 145) to record your current session in a session file. Note that state files will not
preserve your Frozen Copy user variables.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
1. Copy the StaticMixer_001.res file (provided with a tutorial) to your working directory and load it
into CFD-Post.
4. When the New Object window appears, type the name Radial Distance, and then click OK.
5. In the variable details view, set Expression to radial (which is the expression you created earlier).
This variable appears in the tree view and can be used like any other variable. Notice that the variable
is listed as User Defined.
2. In the New Isosurface dialog box, enter a name and then click OK.
This is a suitable value for results from the StaticMixer_001.res file. You may need to
alter this value to something sensible depending on the results you are viewing.
4. Click the Color tab and set the Mode option to Variable. Select a sensible variable (such as, Temper
ature or Velocity) with which to color the isosurface.
5. Set the Range option to Local so that the full color range is used on the Isosurface.
You should now see a cylindrical Isosurface centered about the Z-axis. All points on the Isosurface are
a distance of 1 m (or the value you used in the Value box) from the Z-axis. Note that a cylinder can
also be created as a surface of revolution. For details, see Surface of Revolution Command (p. 174). Ad-
ditional information on expressions is available; for details, see Further Expressions (p. 58).
Note
• When a setting is defined by an expression, and the latter evaluates to a quantity that has no
units, the software internally applies the default units for that setting.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Expressions Workspace
• In an expression, a term that has no units can be added to a term that has angular units, in which
case the software internally applies radians to the term that has no units.
• When using expressions in multifile and case-comparison situations, a specific expression syntax is employed.
For further information, see Examples of the Calling Syntax for an Expression in the CFX Reference Guide.
• You cannot create an expression with the same name as an object or variable.
• Within the CFX Expression Language, some variables are known by short names to save typing the full
variable name. For example, p refers to Pressure. Although it is possible to create an expression with the
same name as an abbreviated variable, it is ignored. For example, if you define an expression named p with
the definition 5 [K], an expression defined as 2*p represents 2*Pressure, not 10 [K].
• You must always provide units inside square brackets for constant values typed into an expression.
Note
• CFD-Post evaluates expressions on slice planes by first interpolating the variables in the expression
to the "plane points" (that is, the places where the plane is cut by mesh edges), and then evaluates
the expression.
• The CFX-Solver evaluates expressions on the vertices and then interpolates to the plane points.
The results given by these two approaches (evaluate and then interpolate vs. interpolate
and then evaluate) will differ most significantly where the variable gradients are large.
Command Description
Use as Workbench Input Specifies the expressions that are to be used as parameters
Parameter in a Design Exploration session. These parameterized
expressions are saved to the CFD-Post state file. To
Use as Workbench Output parameterize an expression, right-click the expression and
Parameter select Use as Workbench Input Parameter or Use as
Workbench Output Parameter. The icon next to the
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
Command Description
expression changes to help identify it as a parameterized
expression.
Any expressions not containing variables are evaluated when you click Apply.
1. Enter the definition of a new expression or edit the definition of an existing expression in the Definition
text field.
3. Click Reset to restore the expression to the definition stored in the database.
Use this to undo changes that have not yet been applied.
4. Click Apply to commit any changes or entries made in the Definition box.
After you have defined an expression, you can right-click it to make it a parameter for use in a Design
Exploration:
• If the expression will not influence CFX-Pre, you may choose Use as Workbench input parameter. Note
that this is not a common situation.
• If the expression will influence CFX-Pre, you must use the Expression shortcut menu in CFX-Pre to make
the expression an ANSYS Workbench input parameter.
1. If you have multiple cases loaded and an expression that applies to only one case highlighted, specify
the Case.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Expressions Workspace
2. Choose the number of sample data points (# of Points) of the expression that you would like plotted.
3. Select the independent variable (X) of the expression for use in the plot.
All other values are constant (their check boxes cannot also be checked). Enter fixed values for
them.
After viewing the chart, you may click Define Plot to return the Plot tab to its previous state (which
shows the plot settings).
1. If you have multiple cases loaded and a locator-based function (such as "areaAve(Pressure)@outlet")
highlighted, specify the Case in which you want the expression evaluated.
2. If the expression requires that you provide values, type them in.
2. In the Insert Expression dialog box, type a name for the expression and click OK.
3. In the Definition area of the Expression details view, enter the expression: sqrt(X^2+Y^2)
Note that the Value field shows that the variable has units of meters. The value is variable so a
single number cannot be shown, as indicated by the placeholder: <variable>.
Here, you can define a simple 2D plot. Because the function has two independent variables1, you
must select a constant value for one of the variables.
1
CFD-Post automatically finds the variables associated with an expression, even if the expression depends on another expression.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
CFD-Post Graphical Interface
This selects X as the variable that varies. All other variables requires a fixed value (for plotting).
A plot shows the variation in the expression with values of X ranging from 0 to 1 [m] and the
value of Y held constant at 3 [m].
The value 3.05 [m] appears in the Value field. This is consistent with the plot and can easily be
verified.
For details on the functions available from the Calculators workspace, see:
For details about using the Turbo workspace, see Turbo Workspace (p. 293).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 4: CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
CFD-Post can be run in two modes:
• As a stand-alone application started from the ANSYS CFX Launcher and independent of the ANSYS Workbench
software
Note
This chapter assumes that you are familiar with using CFD-Post in stand-alone mode. You
should consult the ANSYS Workbench help for more detailed information on ANSYS Work-
bench.
To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface, type the path to “runwb2” (for
example, “~/ansys_inc/v180/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2”), then press Enter.
The ANSYS Workbench interface is organized to make it easy to choose the tool set that will enable
you to solve particular types of problems. Once you have chosen a system from the Toolbox and moved
it into the Project Schematic, supporting features such as Properties and Messages provide orienting
information. These features and the status indicators in the system cells guide you through the completion
of the System steps.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
4.1.1. Toolbox
The Toolbox shows the systems available to you:
Analysis Systems
Systems that match the workflow required to solve particular types of problems. For example, the Fluid
Flow (CFX) system contains tools for creating the geometry, performing the meshing, setting up the
solver, using the solver to derive the solution, and viewing the results.
Component Systems
Systems based on software or software sets. For example, the CFX component system contains Setup
(CFX-Pre), Solution (CFX-Solver Manager), and Results (CFD-Post). The Results component system contains
only Results (CFD-Post).
Custom Systems
Systems that combine separate analysis systems. For example, the FSI: Fluid Flow (CFX) > Static Structural
system combines ANSYS CFX and the Mechanical application to perform a unidirectional (that is, one-way)
Fluid Structure Interaction (FSI) analysis.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The ANSYS Workbench Interface
Design Exploration
Systems that enable you to see how changes to parameters affect the performance of the system.
Note
Which systems are shown in the Toolbox depends on the licenses that exist on your system.
You can hide systems by enabling View > Toolbox Customization and clearing the check
box beside the name of the system you want to hide.
When you move a system from the Component Systems toolbox to the Project Schematic, you will
see a system similar to the following:
Each white cell represents a step in solving a problem. Right-click the cell to see what options are
available for you to complete a step.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
To display the Properties for a particular cell, right-click the cell and select Properties. Once the
Properties view is open, simply selecting a cell in the Project Schematic will display its properties.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
The ANSYS Workbench Interface
Note
Important
Although the Files View reveals the data files that make up a project, you should not attempt
to manipulate these files directly, as project data management will proceed unaware of your
changes and with unpredictable results.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
ANSYS Workbench associates data with system cells. This data may be stored in different ways, including
as part of the ANSYS Workbench project file or as separate files. When files are generated, they appear
in the Files view. This view can be used to identify which files are associated with each cell.
The table that follows associates cell types with file types and gives typical extensions for those file
types.
Report.htmlb
a
Does not include animation files or the output of Save Picture commands.
b
Generated file (Generated files are not copied when you duplicate a system and are removed when you run the Clear Generated
Data command.)
• Save operations default to the user_files directory. The user_files directory appears under the
directory that holds the Project file (projectfile_name/user_files/).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench
• Open operations default to the permanent files directory. The permanent files directory holds the Project
file.
• Export operations initially default to the user_files directory, but change to the last directory used for
an export operation during a session.
In addition, there is an icon in the directory tree that takes you to the user_files, and all recent
directory selections are available from the directory path drop-down selector.
Note
Although this example uses a Fluid Flow (CFX) analysis system to show workflow, CFD-Post
is the results viewing program for a variety of Analysis and Custom systems such as the Fluid
Flow (Fluent) analysis system. CFD-Post can also be launched from a Results component
system.
1. You begin by launching ANSYS Workbench, which opens as an unsaved project and displays the available
analysis systems.
2. In your file system you create a directory in which to store your project files. You then select File > Save
As and save your new project to that directory. This automatically sets your working directory for this
project.
3. In the Analysis Systems toolbox, double-click Fluid Flow (CFX) to create a fluid-analysis system in the
Project Schematic. (Notice that if you “hover” over systems in the Toolbox, a tool tip appears.)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
The fluid-analysis system in the Project Schematic shows the steps in performing a fluid analysis:
4. In addition to showing those steps in appropriately named cells, each cell can launch a tool that will enable
you to perform the task it names. Right-click the Geometry cell to see your options for adding a geometry
to your project:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
An Introduction to Workflow within ANSYS CFX in ANSYS Workbench
5. As you move through the cells from Geometry to Results, you can choose to launch the tool that will
enable you to complete the cell's step: create a new geometry with ANSYS DesignModeler, create a new
mesh with ANSYS Meshing, edit the case with ANSYS CFX-Pre, control the solver's solution with ANSYS
CFX-Solver Manager, and control the display of the results with CFD-Post.
Note
You could open a Fluid Flow (CFX) system and go immediately to the Setup cell to import
an existing case. When the case is loaded, the now-unnecessary Geometry and Mesh
cells disappear.
6. When the analysis is complete and the project is finished, you save the project (and therefore the associated
files). Once a project has been saved, it can be re-opened at a later date for review or modification of any
aspect of the simulation.
Important
Saving a project enables you to re-open the project on the machine that originally created
it. To make the project available on another machine, you need to use File > Archive to
create a project archive. To open the project on a different machine, run File > Restore
Archive on that machine.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
This section describes how to acquire, edit, and run script files that have commands that affect CFD-
Post. For more general information on journal files as well as scripting, refer to the ANSYS Workbench
online help.
Note
• Journal actions such as a CFD-Post Export or the loading of a static .res file record the path of
the file. You may need to manually adjust this filepath before attempting to rerun the journal,
particularly if you have created the journal using an unsaved project. More generally, when you
create a project, you should save the project immediately to set file paths that ANSYS Workbench
uses (rather than require ANSYS Workbench to use file paths that have temporary directories, as
happens before the project is saved).
• The handling of file paths described in File Path Handling in ANSYS Workbench in the ANSYS AIM
and Workbench Scripting Guide applies to file references that are made outside of CCL and com-
mand actions.
2. Start journaling: Select File > Scripting > Record Session and set a name for the journal file.
3. From Toolbox panel, open a system that has a Results cell with an available solution.
4. Edit the Results cell. The actions you perform are captured by the journaling process and written to a
.wbjn file.
7. Run File > Scripting > Run Script File and select a .wbjn file.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Using ANSYS Workbench Journaling and Scripting with CFD-Post
Edit the Results cell and load the Results file (StaticMixer_001.res)
results1 = system1.GetContainer(ComponentName="Results")
results1.Edit()
results1.SendCommand(Command=r"""DATA READER:
Clear All Objects = false
Append Results = true
Edit Case Names = false
Open to Compare = false
Multi Configuration File Load Option = Separate Cases
Open in New View = true
Keep Camera Position = true
Load Particle Tracks = true
Files to Compare =
END
DATA READER:
Domains to Load=
END
> load filename=C:\StaticMixer_001.res, multifile=append""")
Set the camera and define a plane colored with a constant color
CFX.SendCommand(
Container="Results",
Command="""VIEW:View 1
Camera Mode = User Specified
CAMERA:
Option = Pivot Point and Quaternion
Pivot Point = 0, 0, 0
Scale = 0.226146
Pan = 0, 0
Rotation Quaternion = 0.279848, -0.364705, -0.115917, 0.880476
Send To Viewer = False
END
END
# ...
# (Lines omitted for brevity)
# ...
END""")
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
The commands in the script above are the default values for a plane.
4.4.2. Scripting
Scripting refers to the processes of editing and running a journal file in ANSYS Workbench. You can
create your own scripts and include the power of Python to implement high-level programming con-
structs for input, output, variables, and logic. The example that follows illustrates this for CFD-Post.
Before running this script, you would have to first open the Command Window dialog box (by selecting
File > Scripting > Open Command Window from the ANSYS Workbench main menu). To run the
script, you would select File > Scripting > Run Script File from the ANSYS Workbench main menu and
then use the browser to open the file containing the script.
x = int(raw_input("Enter an integer: 1=Velocity, 2=Pressure: "))
if x == 1:
print 'Velocity'
CFX.SendCommand(
Container="Results",
Command="""PLANE:Plane 1
Colour Mode = Variable
Colour Variable = Velocity
END""")
elif x == 2:
print 'Pressure'
CFX.SendCommand(
Container="Results",
Command="""PLANE:Plane 1
Colour Mode = Variable
Colour Variable = Pressure
END""")
Depending on the value of x you input in the Command Window, the script includes the CCL in the
appropriate CFX.SendCommand argument to set the values for Colour Mode and Colour Vari
able in the PLANE:Plane 1 object for either the Velocity or Pressure variable.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tips on Using ANSYS Workbench
Compact Mode is very useful. It turns the schematic into a small non-intrusive button that is always on
top, effectively replacing the need for the toolbar navigation.
The undo stack is cleared in CFD-Post after the application receives commands from ANSYS Workbench.
You cannot launch ANSYS CFX products from one another in ANSYS Workbench; you must use the
system cells.
ANSYS Workbench "remembers" previous locations of imported files / projects. CFD-Post, however,
displays different behavior for loading or saving any files, always using the directory specified in the
Tools > Options > Default Folder for Permanent Files in ANSYS Workbench.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
to reset the Results cell to update the CFD-Post case name if the system is renamed, but you will lose
any existing CFD-Post settings and objects by doing this.
In ANSYS Workbench, the state of CFD-Post is associated with the Results cell. To maintain multiple
states, you must generate multiple Results systems. For your convenience, you can provide a unique
name for each system.
To perform a file comparison in CFD-Post, drag a Solution cell from another system to the Results cell.
You can have CFD-Post generate report output at every update (by setting Generate Reports in Results
cell Properties view). The .html file is visible in the Files view: right-click it, select Open containing
folder, and double-click the file in the explorer to see the report in a browser.
When updating existing Results cell data (with CFD-Post open) where a turbo chart with an averaged
variable was used (for example, turbo reports), a warning dialog box may appear reporting that "No
data exists for variable …" This warning can be ignored.
You can change the CFD-Post multi-configuration load options (available on the Load Results File
dialog box of CFD-Post when in stand-alone mode) by editing the properties of the Solution cell. This
is a property of the Solution cell, rather than the Results cell.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Limitations When Using ANSYS CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench
If you are using custom report templates in CFD-Post, you should avoid using UNC paths (paths that
begin with two backslashes rather than a drive letter) when using Remote Solve Manager. You can
use one of the following methods to avoid using UNC paths:
– Instead of using a shared cluster directory on the machine that has the head node of the compute cluster,
set up a scratch directory on each machine that has an execution node. Each machine will then refer to
its own local directory, which does not require access via a network path.
– Use a shared directory on the machine that has the head node of the compute cluster. On each machine
that has an execution node, map the network path to that shared directory (or any parent directory of it)
as a drive letter. Use that drive letter when specifying the path to the shared directory.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 5: CFD-Post 3D Viewer
In CFD-Post, the 3D Viewer is accessible by clicking the 3D Viewer tab at the bottom of the panel on
the right side of the interface.
After loading a results file into CFD-Post, you can see a visual representation of the geometry in the 3D
Viewer. You can create various other objects that can be viewed in the 3D Viewer. For details, see CFD-
Post Insert Menu (p. 147).
Descriptions of the various viewing modes and 3D Viewer commands, including toolbars, shortcut
menus, and hotkeys, are given in 3D Viewer Modes and Commands (p. 76).
You can switch between four adjustable “views” that each remember the camera angle and state of
visibility of all objects. CFD-Post has “figures”, which are similar to views except that they can be included
in reports. For details, see Views and Figures (p. 83).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Once an object has been hidden, you can show it again by right-clicking on the background of the
Viewer and selecting Show Object:
Tool Description
Activates one of the three picking tools (shown below).
Selects objects. You can use this tool to drag line, point, plane, and isosurface objects to new
locations.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
3D Viewer Modes and Commands
Tool Description
Selects objects using a box. Drag a box around the objects you want to select.
Selects objects using an enclosed polygon. Click to drop points around the objects. Double-click
to complete the selection.
Note
Polygon Select mode will not allow you to create an invalid region, such as would
occur if you attempted to move a point such that the resulting line would cross
an existing line in the polygon.
Rotates the view as you drag with the mouse. Alternatively, hold down the middle mouse button
to rotate the view.
Pans the view as you drag with the mouse. Alternatively, you can pan the view by holding down
Ctrl and the middle mouse button.
Adjusts the zoom level as you drag with the mouse vertically. Alternatively, you can zoom the
view by holding down Shift and the middle mouse button.
Zooms to the area enclosed in a box that you create by dragging with the mouse. Alternatively,
you can drag and zoom the view by holding down the right mouse button.
Centers all visible objects in the viewer.
When enabled, clicking on an object in the tree view causes that object to be highlighted in the
3D Viewer. The style of highlighting is controlled by Edit > Options > CFD-Post > Viewer >
Object Highlighting > Type.
Selects the viewport arrangement. You can perform Independent zoom, rotation and translate
options in each viewport.
Toggles between locking and unlocking the views of all viewports. When the views are locked,
the camera orientation and zoom level of the non-selected viewports are continuously
synchronized with the selected viewport. Locking the view for the viewports in this way can be
a useful technique for comparing different sets of visible objects between the viewports. This
tool is available only when all viewports are using the Cartesian (X-Y-Z) transformation.
Toggles between synchronizing the visibility of objects in all viewports. When active, any
subsequent action to hide or display an object affects all viewports; activating this feature does
not affect any existing show/hide states.
Note
This toggle will not synchronize the visibility of objects in different cases that
have the same name. However, in file comparison mode CFD-Post does
synchronize the visibility of objects that have the same name.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Tool Description
Displays the Viewer Key Mapping dialog box. See Viewer Hotkeys (p. 80) for details.
Command Description
Deformation Specifies the deformation scale to be viewed. This option is only available when
the Total Mesh Displacement variable exists. When an option is selected,
it will be applied to all objects in every view and figure. Select from the following:
• Undeformed
• True Scale
• 0.5x Auto
• Auto
• 2x Auto
• 5x Auto
• Custom...
Opens the Deformation Scale dialog box and displays the currently applied
scale value for the deformation. Specify a new value to change the scale.
• Animate...
Opens the Animation dialog box in Quick Animation mode. For details,
see Animating Mesh Deformation Scaling (p. 255).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
3D Viewer Modes and Commands
Command Description
Copy to New Figure Creates a new figure based on the current camera position, zoom level, and object
visibility settings. For details, see Views and Figures (p. 83). The figure appears
under the Report object, and can be used in a report. For details, see
Report (p. 33). The Make copies of objects check box controls how the new figure
is made:
• When the check box is selected, visible objects are copied for the new figure. Use
this option if you want the figure to retain its appearance when the original objects
are modified.
• When the check box is cleared, only the camera position, zoom level, and the
object visibility settings are stored in the definition of the figure. Use this option
if you want the figure to automatically update with changes to the original objects.
Show Object Shows hidden objects, boundaries, and regions. See Object Visibility (p. 75).
Copy Camera From If you have set a Predefined Camera angle in another view, selecting Copy Camera
From > view name will apply that angle to the current view.
Predefined Camera Displays different views by changing the camera angle to a preset direction.
Fit View
Centers all visible objects in the viewer. This is equivalent to clicking the icon.
Auto-Fit View Automatically fits the view while you rotate the camera or resize the 3D Viewer.
This disables the manual resizing actions otherwise available from the toolbar or
mouse.
Projection Switches between perspective and orthographic camera angles.
Clip Scene Controls scene clipping via clip planes. For details, see Clip Plane Command (p. 218).
Default Legend Shows or hides the default legend object.
Axis Shows or hides the axis orientation indicator (known as the triad) in the
bottom-right corner of the viewer.
Ruler Shows or hides the ruler on the bottom of the viewer.
Save Picture Same as selecting File > Save Picture. For details, see Save Picture
Command (p. 112).
Viewer Options Opens the Options dialog box with the viewer options displayed. For details, see
Viewer (p. 140).
Command Description
Edit Opens the object for editing.
Hide Hides the selected object in the 3D Viewer.
Animate Brings up the Animation dialog box and animates the selected object
automatically. For details, see Quick Animation (p. 254).
Color Enables you to change the selected object’s color.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Command Description
Render Enables you to change some of the selected object’s render options (such
as lighting and face visibility). To change other render options, select Edit
and make your changes on the object's Render tab.
Insert Opens another menu with options to insert planes, contours, streamlines,
etc. For details, see CFD-Post Insert Menu (p. 147).
Set Plane Center For planes defined using the Point and Normal method, this action
moves the point that defines the plane. This changes the focus for plane
bounding operations. See Plane Bounds (p. 158).
Reflect/Mirror Applies a reflection to the selected domain. To use this command, right-click
the corresponding wireframe in the viewer.
Probe Variable Opens a toolbar at the bottom of the viewer allowing the specification of
coordinate points and variable type. After each field is changed, the solution
automatically generates to the right of the variable type setting. For details,
see Probe (p. 262).
Key Action
space Toggles between picking and viewing mode.
arrow keys Rotates about horizontal and vertical axes.
Ctrl + up/down Rotates about an axis normal to the screen.
arrow keys
Shift + arrow keys Moves the light source.
1 Switches to one viewport.
2 Switches to two viewports.
3 Switches to three viewports.
4 Switches to four viewports.
C Centers the graphic object in the viewer window.
N Toggles the projection between orthographic
and perspective.
R Resets the view to the initial orientation.
S Toggles the level of detail between auto, off, and
on.
U Undoes transformation.
Shift+U Redoes transformation.
X Sets view from +X axis.
Shift+X Sets view from -X axis.
Y Sets view from +Y axis.
Shift+Y Sets view from -Y axis.
Z Sets view from +Z axis.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
3D Viewer Modes and Commands
Key Action
Shift+Z Sets view from -Z axis.
The information in this table is accessible by clicking the Show Help Dialog toolbar icon in the 3D
Viewer toolbar.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
Shift + right
mouse button
Rotate Rotate the view about the pivot point Middle mouse button
(if no pivot point is visible, the rotation
point will be the center of the object).
Set Pivot Set the point about which the Rotate Left mouse button Ctrl + middle mouse
Point actions pivot. The point selected must when in rotate, pan, button
be on an object in the 3D Viewer. zoom, or zoom box
When you set the pivot point, it mode (as set by the
appears as a small red sphere that icons in the viewer's
moves (along with the point on the toolbar).
image where you clicked) to the center
of the 3D Viewer. To hide the red dot
that represents the pivot point, click a
blank area in the 3D Viewer.
Move Light Move the lighting angle for the 3D Ctrl + right mouse Ctrl + right mouse
Viewer. Drag the mouse left or right button button
to move the horizontal lighting source
and up or down to move the vertical
lighting source. The light angle hold
two angular values between 0 - 180.
Picking Mode Select an object in the viewer. Ctrl + Shift + left Ctrl + Shift + left
mouse button mouse button
object or region to allow it to be picked. Enter picking mode by selecting the Single Select tool in
a pull-down menu of the viewer toolbar. If the Single Select icon is already visible, you can simply
You can also pick objects while still in viewing mode by holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys as you
click in the viewer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Views and Figures
You can change the picking mode by selecting one of the toolbar icons:
• Single Select
• Box Select
• Polygon Select
The contents of a viewport are a view, which is a CCL object that contains the camera angle, zoom level,
lighting, and visibility setting of each object in the tree view.
Each viewport contains a different, independent view. By default, four views exist: View 1, View 2, View
3, View 4.
When you select an object in the tree view, its information is applied to the active viewport. When you
manipulate an object in the viewport, the view's CCL is updated immediately. However if the focus is
on that viewport, you can press u to revert your change.
In CFD-Post, you can create figures, which are the same as views, except that they are usable in reports.
For details, see Report (p. 33).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
A new figure gets its definition from the currently existing view or figure. The latter remains active so
that subsequent view manipulations do not affect the new figure.
Any copied objects for a figure will appear in the tree view under User Locations and Plots >
Local Objects for FigureName, where FigureName is the name of the figure.
• For figures only: Double-click the figure in the tree view (under the Report object).
• For figures only: Right-click the figure in the tree view (under the Report object), then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
2. Change the view or figure (for example, rotate the view) either directly, or, in CFD-Post only, select one
of the Copy Camera From commands from the viewer shortcut menu after right-clicking a blank area of
the viewer.
View and figure objects are saved automatically when you switch to a different view or figure.
2. Select the Delete Figure command from the viewer shortcut menu after right-clicking a blank area of
the viewer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Views and Figures
5.3.5. Views
There are four default views that are handled specially. These are named: View 1, View 2, View 3, and
View 4. These views will not be included in CFD-Post reports. However, any of these views can be viewed
in any of the viewports, and you can create new views or figures that will be shown in reports.
The VIEW object has a parameter named Object Visibility List that is set to a comma-separated
list of object paths that should be visible in the VIEW object.
Here is an example of the VIEW object CCL to define the visibility for the view:
VIEW: View 1 Object Visibility List=/PLANE:Plane 1, /VECTOR:Vector 4END
Note
The Object Visibility List parameter should contain only object paths, and not
object names.
For session files, there are command actions that enable you to change the visibility of objects:
• >show
• >hide
• >toggle
Each of these actions take an object name, path, or list of names and paths for which to show, hide, or
toggle the visibility. Also, the actions optionally take a parameter that specifies the view to show the
object. The visibility action parameters can alternatively take names or entire paths to specify the objects
and the views.
Example 1: The following action will show the object /PLANE:Plane 1 in all existing views, including
user figures.
>show Plane 1
Example 2: The following action will hide both /PLANE:Plane 1 and /PLANE:Plane 2 in view
/VIEW:View 1.
>hide Plane 1, /PLANE:Plane 2, view=View 1
Example 3: If Plane 1 is visible, and Plane 2 is not visible in /VIEW:View 2, the following action
will make /PLANE:Plane 1 not visible, and /PLANE:Plane 2 visible in view /VIEW:View 2:
>toggle Plane 1, Plane 2, view=/VIEW:View 2
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
CFD-Post 3D Viewer
5.3.5.2. Legends
There is a default legend for each VIEW object. The default legend is automatically created and deleted
along with the view. By default, the default legend is made visible in the view it is associated with.
4. Have set your view to Perspective mode (right-click in the Viewer and select Projection > Perspective)
b. Set the Stereo Effect. The value of the "stereo effect" that is required is related to the distance
between the observer and the display. If the stereo effect is too strong, either move away from the
display, or move the slider towards Weaker.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 6: CFD-Post Workflow
CFD-Post enables you to qualitatively visualize and quantitatively analyze the processes taking place in
a simulation; thus, the general workflow is:
1. Planning steps:
a. Decide which variables you want to study (your options are constrained by the variables that were
solved in the process of creating the solver results file).
c. Decide how you want to display those variables, either qualitative displays (such as contour plots and
charts) or quantitative analysis and displays (such as tables).
2. Production steps:
a. Load the solver results file for the simulation into CFD-Post.
c. Optionally, publish the report, picture, or animation that shows the findings of the study to best advant-
age.
If those elements do not provide enough resolution, you can make use of CFD-Post's features to add:
• Locations where you can display or analyze variable values (points, point clouds, lines, planes, volumes,
isosurfaces, vortex core regions, surfaces of revolution, polylines, user surfaces, and surface groups).
• Using selected locations, generate vectors, contours, streamlines and particle tracks to generate qualitative
displays of the results.
• Expressions or macros that you can use to make new variables or to perform quantitative evaluation, integ-
ration, and averaging.
CFD-Post provides a wide range of control over the 3D Viewer, such as:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
CFD-Post Workflow
• How the graphical object is to be colored; either prescribed color or by variable. If colored by variable, how
the color is mapped over the range of the selected variable.
• Display of lines and faces as well as geometric transformations including rotation, translation, scaling, reflec-
tion and instancing.
• Up to four viewports where the orientation of the objects in these miniature viewers can be controlled in-
dependently.
6.3. Analysis
The quantitative analysis of variables can be displayed in the Table Viewer to enable you to display
data and expressions.
• Use the Expressions workspace to make new variables and to numerically process results using a variety
of mathematical operations, such as averaging and integration.
– Invoke analysis macros supplied for various applications including fan noise, turbomachinery performance,
and so on
• Save a picture of the contents of the 3D Viewer in a variety of formats, including PNG, PostScript, and VRML.
• Publish a report, an HTML publication that includes information about the solver results file, the mesh, and
the physics (as well as any other qualitative information, quantitative information, or comments you want
to add).
• Produce an animation showing the changes in a variable over a range in the domain.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Typical Workflow
2. Load one or more results files. (Load Results Command (p. 91))
3. Create expressions (Expressions Workspace (p. 54)) and/or invoke macros (Predefined Macros (p. 268)) to
perform the desired numerical processing of results.
4. Create any new variables that will be used for qualitative display. (Variables Workspace (p. 49))
5. Examine the existing locations (wireframe and surface boundaries) and create any additional locators re-
quired. (Location Submenu (p. 148))
6. For each locator, select visibility, method of coloring, rendering, and transformation.
7. Create any additional objects (such as lines, vectors, or contours) for quantitative display. (CFD-Post Insert
Menu (p. 147))
8. For each object, select visibility, method of coloring, rendering, and transformation.
9. Use the 3D Viewer to explore the graphic objects and produce animations as required. (CFD-Post 3D
Viewer (p. 75))
10. Create tables of data as required and display in the Table Viewer. (Table Command (p. 221))
11. Create any desired charts and display in the Chart Viewer. (Chart Command (p. 226))
12. Generate or edit any required titles, legends, or labels (Legend Command (p. 210) and Text Command (p. 206))
13. If required, save a picture of the contents in the 3D Viewer. (Save Picture Command (p. 112))
14. Display the report in the Report Viewer and/or modify the report as required. (Report Command (p. 112))
15. Optionally, publish the report to an HTML file. (Report (p. 33))
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 7: CFD-Post File Menu
This chapter describes the commands that are available from the File menu:
7.1. Load Results Command
7.2. Close Command
7.3. Load State Command
7.4. Save State Command and Save State As Command
7.5. Save Project Command
7.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only)
7.7. Import Commands
7.8. Export Commands
7.9. Mechanical Import/Export Commands
7.10. FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping
7.11. Report Command
7.12. Save Picture Command
7.13. Loading Recently Accessed Files
7.14. Quit Command
7.15. File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
The file types that you can load and display are described in File Types Used and Produced by CFD-
Post (p. 115).
The Load Results File dialog box presents you with the following options:
If Keep current cases loaded is selected, you can choose Open in new view to see the two cases
side-by-side. If you choose to open the new case the same view, the two cases overlap and the title
bar of the view displays All cases. However, you can use the Viewer's toolbar to manually display
two views, then manually display change All cases to Case 1 in View 1 and Case 2 in View 2. If
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
CFD-Post File Menu
you have loaded two cases and you select Tools > Compare cases, each case appears in a separate
view, with the differences displayed in a third view.
Note
The Keep current cases loaded option is particularly useful to perform simultaneous
postprocessing of both fluid (CFX) and solid (ANSYS) results when a two-way Fluid-
Structure simulation has been performed.
Note
Before loading any variable from a results file, CFD-Post deletes from its memory any
user-defined variable of the same name.
Failing to clear the user state will cause CFD-Post to apply the state of the current file to the results
file being loaded. For Turbo cases, it is important to ensure that settings such as the number of in-
stances in 360 degrees is correct (or to adjust the setting to be correct after the file is loaded) as
CFD-Post does not automatically check to see if the user settings match between files.
If you want to postprocess both the derived and solved variables for the same results file, you can
use the Keep current cases loaded option and load the results twice: once with the Construct
Variables From Fourier Coefficients option selected, and once with that option not selected.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Load Results Command
• Choose Load only the last results to load only the last configuration of a multi-configuration results
file, or only the last results from a results file that contains a run history.
• Choose Load complete history as: a single case to load all configurations of a multi-configuration run
as a single case, or all of the results history from a results file that contains a run history. In either case,
only one set of results will appear in the viewer, but you can use the timestep selector to move between
results. This option is not fully supported.
Note
When multi-configuration files are loaded as a single sequence, the solution expressions
(Reference Pressure, and so on) represent the last configuration, no matter which
configuration is currently viewed.
• Choose Load complete history as: separate cases to load all configurations from a multi-configuration
run into separate cases. If a results file with run history is loaded, CFD-Post loads the results from this
file and the results for any results file in its run history as separate cases. Each result appears as a separate
entry in the tree.
Note
When loading multiple configurations, the final results file determines whether all config-
urations have particle tracks (as this is how transient particle tracks are determined). If
the physics for each configuration differs significantly, do not use this method of loading
files.
Note
• You can multi-select results files by holding the Ctrl key while you click the filenames.
For transient results, it is recommended that you load only the case file (Fluent results) or
the results file (CFX results). CFD-Post automatically loads all of the other data files corres-
ponding to different time steps and creates the time series. Selecting multiple intermediate
transient files would lead to multiple sets of results being loaded; each intermediate
transient file would load as a separate set of results.
• To unload a set of results, right-click the case name in the tree view and select Unload.
• To replace the selected results file with another results file while keeping the state, right-click
the case name and select Replace results file. (Reloading the results file through the Load Results
panel may not recover the state completely, in particular when Turbo Post is initialized.) Note
that the Replace results file function will keep the original case name even though the results
file has changed.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
CFD-Post File Menu
If you select the Don't show this panel again option, all domains will be loaded automatically on
subsequent uses of the Load Results command. Note that you can always re-enable this dialog box
from the Edit > Options > Files panel (select Show domain selector before load).
Once you have specified the units that were used in the results file, CFD-Post can convert those units
to your preferred display units.
You set your preferred display units by selecting Edit > Options, then Common > Units from the menu
bar; for details, see Setting the Display Units (p. 142).
Note
In CFD-Post, the temperature solution units must be an absolute scale (for example, Kelvin
[K] or Rankine [R]); you cannot use Celsius and Fahrenheit. Temperature quantities elsewhere
in ANSYS CFX can be set in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
You can optionally choose to use variable values that apply to the nearest full results file by changing
an option in the Options dialog box. For details, see Turbo (p. 140).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Save State Command and Save State As Command
Note
Timestep and phase information are not stored in the state file, so loading a state file does
not change the timestep or phase.
• Replace current state selected and Load results selected: The results file used to create the state file is
opened, all existing objects are deleted, and new objects that are defined in the state file are created. The
results are plotted on the new objects.
• Replace current state selected and Load results cleared: All existing objects are deleted and new objects
that are defined in the state file are created. The results are plotted on the new objects using the existing
results.
• Add to current state selected and Load results selected: The results file used to create the state file is
opened. All objects defined in the state file and all existing objects are plotted with the new results. If objects
in the state file have the same name as existing objects, the existing objects are replaced by those in the
state file.
• Add to current state selected and Load results cleared: All objects defined in the state file are created and
plotted using the current results. Existing objects are not removed unless they have the same name as an
object in the state file, in which case they are replaced.
Results files may contain CEL expressions. If you have one or more results files already loaded and you
are about to load a state file, you can prevent overwriting these expressions by clearing the Load results
check box, then selecting the Preserve current results expressions check box.
Important
A state file is linked to the results file from which it was created by an absolute path. Therefore,
do not change the location of the results file. The state file does not contain the geometry,
mesh, or any results; these are loaded from the results file into CFD-Post.
If you have not saved a state file during your current CFD-Post session, selecting Save State opens the
Save State dialog box where you can enter a filename.
If you have already saved a previous state, selecting Save State overwrites that file. To save a state to
a different filename, you should select Save State As from the File menu.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
CFD-Post File Menu
When CFD-Post is started from ANSYS Workbench, the Save Project command writes the current state
of the project.
• A polyline or surface (see Import Surface or Line Data into CFD-Post (p. 96))
• A Fluent particle track file (see Import Fluent Particle Track File (p. 97))
• A Mechanical CDB Surface (see Import Mechanical CDB Surface (p. 98))
Note
Only CFX-4 and Fluent particle track formats are supported for CFD-Post import.
Click Browse to browse to the file to read the data from, or enter the filename.
Note
Locator Names
If you import a generic file, the locator that is created is named using the locator name stored in the
file, with the prefix Imported. If a locator with the same name already exists, the lowest integer
greater than 1 that creates a unique name is appended. For example, if the imported file specifies a
locator called Line 1, the locator that is created is called Imported Line 1, unless such a locator
already exists, in which case the locator is called Imported Line 1 1. If the latter were the case,
then importing another file with a locator called Line 1 would cause the creation of a locator called
Imported Line 1 2.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Import Commands
requires more information to define the boundary. Refer to USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 104) or
POLYLINE Data Format (p. 103) as appropriate.
The example that follows shows experimental data that can be imported into CFD-Post.
0 - 3
# The face above is created from points 0 through 3
7 - 4
4 1 0
# Tri- and quad-faces may be combined
4 5 1
6 3 2
6 7 3
0 3 7 4
2 1 8
6 2 8
5 6 8
1 5 8
You can also load STL files from the Insert menu in CFD-Post. For details, see Method (p. 180).
For details on creating a particle track file in ANSYS Fluent, see Particle Tracks Dialog Box in the Fluent
User's Guide. For limitations associated with Fluent particle tracks, see Limitations with Fluent Files (p. 125).
For details on configuring the display of a particle track file in ANSYS CFD-Post, see Particle Track
Command (p. 198).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
CFD-Post File Menu
The main purpose of the Mechanical import/export facility in CFD-Post is to enable fluid-structure inter-
action (FSI). The facility enables a mapping of boundary data stored in a CFX results file to a surface
stored in an ANSYS Mesh (.cdb) file.
Note
In the volumetric transfer, the temperature at the unmapped nodes will be set to the average
temperature of all mapped nodes.
For an example of using this option, see Mechanical Import/Export Commands (p. 110).
The Import Mechanical CDB Surface dialog box has the following options:
7.7.3.1. File
The File setting specifies the filename of the file to import. You can type the filepath of the file, or click
7.7.3.3.1. Boundary
The Boundary setting specifies the associated boundary for the imported file.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Export Commands
1. An ANSYS surface node is considered equivalent to the nearest boundary surface node if the node is
within a certain tolerance of each other.
2. An ANSYS surface node is mapped to the closest face if it is closer to a node than the closest edge.
3. An ANSYS surface node is mapped to the closest edge if it is less than a certain tolerance.
Nodes are considered unmapped if none of the above conditions are met, or if the distance from the
node to the closest edge is greater than the allowable tolerance. In this case the ANSYS surface node
is mapped to the nearest boundary surface node regardless of the distance.
Note
This label only appears in the corresponding User Surface panel, after the ANSYS surface
(.cdb) nodes that have been mapped to the CFX boundary surface.
7.8.1. Export
The Export action enables you to export your results to a data file. You may export results for any
available variable in CFD-Post on any defined locator. In the export file, data is written in blocks on a
per locator basis in the order given by the locator list. Each block starts with lines listing the values of
the selected variables at the locator points (one line corresponds to one point).
The following two examples on how to export data are given at the end of this section:
to search for a file to export the results to, or enter a new filename.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
CFD-Post File Menu
7.8.1.1.2. Type
The Type setting has the following options:
Option Description
Generic Exports data to a file, writing the data in blocks for every locator. Each block starts
with listing the values of the selected variables at the locator points. The Generic
option displays the Export Geometry Information check box. For details, see
Export Geometry Information Check Box (p. 101).
BC Pro Creates a boundary condition profile to be exported. The BC Profile option
file enables you to select a Profile Type.
Case Provides a short summary of the results file in xml format.
Summary
Geo Creates a .csv file containing geometric information for the chosen Locations.
metry
Only
STL Creates a .stl file containing geometric information for the chosen Locations.
Only ASCII .stl files are supported.
Note
If you are using the Geometry Only option to export a surface to set up a User Location
in CFX-Pre, ensure that the mesh is in its initial position (not translated, rotated, or deformed).
In CFX-Pre, the 2D User Location is independent from the volume mesh, so the mesh used
in CFD-Post to create the surface must match the initial mesh found in CFX-Pre.
7.8.1.1.3. Locations
Locations is available only if either the Generic or BC Profile option is selected. The Locations
setting specifies the locators for which the results of your variable is written. You can hold down the
Ctrl key to select more than one locator and the Shift key to select a block of locators.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Export Commands
Line and Face Connectivity is available if the Generic or BC Profile option is selected. Select
this check box to export the connectivity information after the coordinate information in the file.
Node Numbers is available only if the Generic option is selected. Select this check box to export the
node numbers after the coordinate information in the file.
Option Description
Inlet Velo Exports the Velocity Vector variable.
city
Inlet Total Exports the Total Pressure, Total Temperat
Pressure ure, and Velocity Direction variables.
Inlet Direc Exports the Velocity Direction variable.
tion
Inlet Super Exports the Velocity Vector, Pressure, and
sonic Temperature variables.
Outlet Exports the Pressure variable.
Pressure
Wall Exports the Velocity Vector and Temperature
variables.
Custom Enables you to select custom variables to export from the
Select Variable(s) list box.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
CFD-Post File Menu
The Vector Display options enable you to select either Components or Scalar. The Components setting
writes each component of a vector to the data file. The components appear inside the selected brackets.
The Scalar option writes only the magnitude of a vector quantity.
7.8.1.2.1.2. Brackets
Brackets is available only if the Components option is selected. The Brackets setting selects the type
of brackets to wrap around the components.
Null Token is available only if the Include Nodes With Undefined Variable check box is selected. The
Null Token setting specifies the token to be displayed in the place of an undefined variable value. You
may select the item used as a null token from a predefined list. Examples of a variables with undefined
values include Velocity in a Solid Domain and a variable value at a point outside the solution domain,
which can be created using a polyline, sampling plane or surface locator.
Some variables, including Yplus and Wall Shear, are calculated only on the boundaries of the domain
and are assigned UNDEF values elsewhere.
If the Line and Face Connectivity check box is selected in the Options tab, then the Null Token is
automatically exported.
7.8.1.2.3. Precision
The Precision setting specifies the precision with which your results are exported. The data is exported
in scientific number format, and Precision sets the number of digits that appear after the decimal point.
For example, 13490 set to a precision of 2 outputs 1.35e+04. The same number set to a precision of
7 yields 1.3490000e+04.
7.8.1.2.4. Separator
The Separator setting specifies the character to separate the numbers in each row.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Export Commands
3. On the Formatting tab, under Vector Variables, ensure that the Vector Display option is set to Scalar.
Note that, on the Formatting tab, there is a Null Token field. This is used to indicate the string that
should be written to represent values that are undefined.
If you want to make your own polyline file with a text editor, follow the format specified below.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
CFD-Post File Menu
The name of each locator is listed under the Name heading. Point coordinates and the corresponding
variable values are stored in the Data section. Line connectivity data is listed in the Lines section,
and references the points in the Data section, where the latter are implicitly numbered, starting with
0.
Comments in the file are preceded by # (or ## for the CFX-5.6 polyline format) and can appear anywhere
in the file.
Blank lines are ignored and can appear anywhere in the file (except between the [<data>] and first
data line, where <data> is one of the key words in square brackets).
This is similar to the polyline data format described earlier (POLYLINE Data Format (p. 103)), except for
the connectivity information. Instead of defining lines, this file defines faces (small surfaces), each by 3
(triangle) to 6 (hexagon) points. The points must be ordered to trace a path going around the face. For
proper rendering, the faces should have consistent point ordering, either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Each face is automatically closed by connecting the last point to the first point. Face connectivity data
is listed in the Faces section and references the points in the Data section, where the latter are implicitly
numbered, starting with 0.
The file format for an ANSYS External Data File (.axdt) is described in ANSYS External Data File Format
in the Workbench User's Guide.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Export Commands
The File setting specifies a file for the data to be exported to. You may type a filename or Browse
to search for a file to export the results to. The default filename is export.axdt and the default filepath
is your current working directory.
7.8.2.1.2. Location
The Location setting specifies the locators for which the results of your variables are written.
Note
For conjugate heat transfer cases, you should make sure that the selected location corresponds
to the fluid/solid side of the interface, as intended.
Note
The following unit systems in CFD-Post are not supported in the External Data system:
• English Engineering
• British Technical
• US Customary
• Custom
In such cases, the External Data system cannot determine the unit system used in the file. If
any of the above systems is selected in CFD-Post, a warning is issued, and the data will be
exported in SI units.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
CFD-Post File Menu
• Heat Flow
Note
For Fluent results, Heat Flow is not always defined at the CHT interface boundaries. You
should ensure that heat fluxes are available at the boundaries you export.
This option allows you to export the Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient and Wall Adjacent Temperature
variables to the external data file.
This option is not available for inviscid flows and Eulerian multiphase cases. For Eulerian multiphase
cases, you can select phase-specific temperatures from the Additional Variables list. For a list of
Fluent field variables and their equivalent in CFD-Post, see Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category.
Note
For cases where you have specifically solved for conjugate heat transfer, it is recommended
that you export the solid-side Temperature, instead of HTC and Wall Adjacent Temper-
ature.
The HTC and Wall Adjacent Temperature variable is not calculated for laminar flow and
will not appear in the Export External Data File window for such cases.
• Temperature
For multiphase cases, CFD-Post will calculate and output the Bulk Temperature, which is the tem-
perature weighted by the volume fraction of the individual phases. You can select phase-specific
temperatures from the Additional Variables list.
Note
For cases where you have specifically solved for conjugate heat transfer, it is recommended
that you export the solid-side temperature instead of the fluid-side temperature.
For multiphase cases that include a combined temperature variable instead of phase-
specific temperatures, CFD-Post will not calculate the Bulk Temperature. However, the
combined temperature variable will be written to the output file under Bulk Temperature.
Note
User defined variables named Temperature or Heat Flow will be ignored and a warning
message will be issued.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Export Commands
Note
User defined variables named Temperature or Heat Flow will be ignored and a warning
message will be issued.
When verifying the load applied to the surface in Mechanical, note that the Pressure variable available
in CFD-Post is not the same as the element stress representing the static structural load. The element
stress variables, Normal Stress, Shear Stress, and Stress (the latter being the combination
of Normal Stress and Shear Stress) are vector quantities, whereas the Pressure variable is
a scalar quantity.
To compare actual boundary data in CFD-Post with the data that is exported:
3. Specify the components as follows: X => Force X / Area, Y => Force Y / Area, and Z => Force Z / Area.
The plot of Surface Force Density on the FSI boundary should look similar to the plot of Impor
ted Pressure in Mechanical. There will be some minor differences due to interpolation and differences
in mesh density.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
CFD-Post File Menu
For an example of using this option, see Mechanical Import/Export Commands (p. 110).
Note
One-way FSI cases with porosity transfer only the fluid quantities for 2D Temperature, 3D
Temperature, Heat Transfer Coefficient, and Heat Flux.
Note
Transfer of data between Fluent and Mechanical through CFD-Post is based on nodal data.
Values that are visualized in CFD-Post may differ from values that are exported. For example
in cases where Wall Heat Flux values are zero on the mapped surface, you would see zero
total flux on the surface, as this calculation is based on face data. However, nodal data may
have nonzero values on surface edge nodes, as it is interpolated from all faces that touch
those nodes, including the ones from the neighboring surface (which may have nonzero
flux). This is the data that will be mapped to Mechanical.
icon to select the name and location of the file to be exported. The default name is export.sfe
or export.xml (depending on which File Format is chosen) and the default filepath is your current
working directory.
7.8.3.1.2. Location
The Location setting selects the Mechanical surface object to export, which is generated by importing
a .cdb file. For details, see Import Mechanical CDB Surface (p. 98).
Note
The Mechanical load file does not contain mesh coordinate data, and must be interpreted
along with the .cdb file originally imported into CFD-Post.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Export Commands
Option Description
Normal Stress Vector Exports Normal Stress variable data onto imported
surf154 surfaces. Normal Stress is a vector variable
calculated from the normal component of Force.
Tangential Stress Exports Shear Stress variable data onto imported surf154
Vector surfaces. Shear stress data is calculated from the tangential
component of Force.
Stress Vector Exports Stress variable data onto imported surf154
surfaces. Stress data is calculated by vector summing the normal
stress and shear data.
Heat Transfer Coeffi Exports convection variable data onto imported surf152
cient surfaces. When selected, the Specify Reference Temperature
check box will appear.
7.8.3.1.6. Fluids
Fluids is available only if either the Tangential Stress Vector or Stress Vector options
are selected. The Fluids setting specifies which fluids, or All Fluids, that will affect the elements
shear or stress values.
1. If you specify a reference temperature, then the exported heat transfer coefficient is calculated based on
Heat Flux and Temperature data. If the case models radiation, then the heat transfer coefficient also
includes the contribution to the heat flux from radiation.
Note that the variable Surface Heat Transfer Coef is not recognized by CFD-Post for one-
way FSI.
2. If you do not specify a reference temperature, the exported data is based on the Wall Heat Transfer
Coefficient and Wall Adjacent Temperature. This includes only the convective contribution
to the heat flux, and does not include any radiative contribution.
For Fluent Cases: To transfer HTC from Fluent cases without specifying a reference temperature
(method 2 above), the following variables have to be exported to the DAT/CDAT file:
• Wall Func. Heat Tran. Coef (which will be converted to the CFX variable Wall Heat Transfer
Coefficient)
• Temperature. In Fluent, the wall adjacent temperature is calculated by averaging the adjacent cell tem-
peratures to the wall nodes.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
CFD-Post File Menu
For more information, see the Reference Guide for Mesh Deformation and Fluid-Structure Interaction
in the CFX Reference Guide.
1. Load the fluids results file, from which you want to transfer results, into CFD-Post
2. Select File > Import > Import Mechanical CDB Surface. The Import ANSYS CDB Surface dialog box
appears.
• Select the CDB file that specifies the surface mesh of the solid object to which to transfer data. Also
select the Associated Boundary for the surface to map onto, and make other selections as appropriate.
• Select the XML document that provides all transfer information. Click OK, and the surface data is loaded.
4. Select File > Export > Export Mechanical Load File. The Export Mechanical Load File dialog box appears.
5. In the Export Mechanical Load File dialog box, select a filename to which to save the data. For the Loc-
ation parameter value, select the imported ANSYS mesh object. Under File Format select ANSYS Load
Commands (FSE or D). (Alternatively, you can select WB Simulation Input (XML) to get XML output.)
Also select the appropriate data to export: Normal Stress Vector, Tangential Stress Vector, Stress Vector,
Heat Transfer Coefficient, Heat Flux, or Temperature. Click Save, and the data file is created.
The one-way FSI data transfer described above is performed automatically when using the FSI: Fluid
Flow (CFX) > Static Structural custom system in ANSYS Workbench. For details, see the FSI: Fluid Flow
(ANSYS CFX) > Static Structural in the Workbench User's Guide section in the ANSYS documentation.
7.10. FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping
You can use CFD-Post to manually generate a load file for Mechanical APDL:
1. Write out a .cdb file that contains the surface or volume mesh by using the CDWRITE command in
Mechanical APDL.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
FSI with Mechanical APDL and CFX: Manual One-way Mapping
For surface load mapping, create a layer of SURF154 elements (pressure) or SURF152 elements
(thermal) on the boundary of interest and write out only these elements to the .cdb file.
Note
If you write out a .cdb file for Temperature surface mapping, there is no need to create
surface-effect elements because Temperature will be the Degrees Of Freedom and is
set directly. Instead, select the nodes on the surface of interest and write these to the
.cdb file.
2. Load the .cdb file into CFD-Post using File > Import > Import Mechanical CDB Surface.
Note
Upon importing the .cdb file, a User Surface object is created in CFD-Post.
• For surface mapping, you can enable the visibility and view the mesh using the usual Render options.
• For volume mapping, enabling the visibility will not display the Mechanical volume mesh.
To see the node locations, create a Point Cloud object scoped to the User Surface with Sampling
= Vertex and a Reduction Factor of 1.
3. Export the load file from CFD-Post using File > Export > Export Mechanical Load File.
• For Stress, Heat Flux, and HTC, the load file will contain SFE commands to apply loads via the
SURF152/SURF154 elements.
• For Temperature:
– A surface load file will contain D commands to set the Degrees of Freedom.
• A structural analysis reads BF loads in Celsius regardless of the units selection in Workbench.
You can open the exported file in a text editor to make sure the values look reasonable.
4. Read the load file into Mechanical APDL using the /input command.
Make sure your solution units are consistent with the values exported from CFD-Post. In particular,
note that Mechanical is Celsius by default, while CFX is Kelvin.
5. After solving, check the Solution Information and the .err file to make sure the /input command was
successful. If the file was not read, the solution will still proceed without the load applied.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
CFD-Post File Menu
Report Templates
Invokes the Report Templates dialog box, where you can browse the list of existing templates or add
(register) a new template. The existing templates are for turbomachinery simulations.
Refresh Preview
Updates the report that is displayed on the Report Viewer. You need to do this after making changes to
your report.
This command is equivalent to clicking on the Refresh icon at the top of the Report Viewer.
Publish
Displays the Publish Report dialog box, where you can configure the format and name of your report.
See Publishing the Report (p. 47) for details.
This command is equivalent to clicking on the Publish icon at the top of the Report Viewer.
menu or click Save Picture . The Save Picture dialog box is displayed.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Save Picture Command
Note
When you save a picture of the Chart Viewer, note that the font sizing and line thickness in
the chart image output are adjusted to approximately reproduce the appearance of the chart
at the initial screen size (700x700 pixels), and are independent of the output image resolution.
Options Tab
The Options tab has the following settings:
File
Enables you to specify the filename of the file. You may enter the filename and path into the File field, or
click the Browse icon and search for the directory in which the file is to be saved.
Files are always saved with the file extension corresponding to the selected graphics format.
Format
To choose a file format, click . When creating a new image file, the file format you choose affects the
quality of the image:
PNG
Portable Network Graphics is a raster file format (*.png) that supports lossless image compression.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
CFD-Post File Menu
JPEG
A compressed file format (*.jpg) developed for compressing raw digital information. File sizes are
relatively small. Due to compression artifacts, this format is not recommended for line drawings.
Windows Bitmap
A file type (*.bmp) that is usually large and does not adjust well to resizing or editing. This file type
does retain all of the quality of the original image and can be easily converted to other formats.
PPM
Portable Pixel Map is a file format (*.ppm) similar to a Windows Bitmap. It is an uncompressed
format and is not recommended for large images.
VRML (3D)
Virtual Reality Modeling Language is a file format (*.wrl) used to present interactive three-dimen-
sional views. The output is VRML 2.0.
AVZ (3D)
ANSYS Viewer Format is a file format (*.avz) used to present interactive three-dimensional views. It
can be displayed using the ANSYS Viewer.
Note
• The Render settings Draw as Lines and Draw as Points are not captured in screen capture
mode.
• When a clip plane is coincident with regions, boundaries, or interfaces that are planes, the
results of a Save Picture command may not match what you see in the 3D Viewer (depending
on the orientation of the case). In this situation, select the Use Screen Capture check box.
When the White Background check box is selected, certain white objects may be colored black and
certain black objects may be colored white in the image file. Objects that are not affected can
usually be manually colored by editing them.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
Width/Height
You can specify the width and height of the image in pixels by entering values for Width and Height. In
order to use these settings, the Use Screen Size check box must be cleared.
Scale (%)
Scale (%) is used to scale the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window
size. This option is available when Use Screen Size is selected.
Image Quality
Image Quality is available only for the JPEG format. A value of 100 specifies the highest image quality; a
value of 1 specifies the lowest image quality.
Tolerance
Tolerance is a non-dimensional value used in face sorting when generating pictures. Larger values result
in faster generation times, but may cause defects in the resulting output.
• Single-domain modeling, such as frozen gust (inlet disturbance (for one domain only, either rotor or stator)).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
CFD-Post File Menu
When a transient blade row case is loaded, CFD-Post automatically creates valid solution variables for
postprocessing (see Variables Tree View (p. 49)).
• For Transient Blade Row cases, transient statistics for boundary-only variables (such as Force,
Mass Flow, Heat Flux) are not available on the following postprocessing locators (points, lines,
cut-planes, isosurfaces, and iso clips).
• CFD-Post displays the global range for plots in transient blade row cases differently than in other
cases. In a transient blade row case, the global range is computed and extended dynamically
based on the selected domain(s) and timestep. For example if you change the definition of a plot
to include another domain, or if you change the timestep, the global range in the plot's legend
will be extended automatically to cover both the original and the new plot definitions.
Transient blade row cases also interact with the timestep selector; see Using the Timestep Selector with
Transient Blade Row Cases (p. 251) for details.
Limitations with a GTM File in Multiple Results Files When loading a state file that loads multiple
results files including a GTM file, load the mesh file first, and then apply the state.
• Are located in a subdirectory that is named according to the base name of the input file
Note
Use the -norun command line option (described in Command-Line Options and Keywords
for cfx5solve in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide) to merge global information into
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
the configuration definition files, and produce a CFX-Solver Input file (.def) file that can
be run by the CFX-Solver.
• Intermediate results files, which include transient and backup files (.trn and .bak, respectively) are
created while running an analysis.
• Final results files for single and multi-configuration simulations (.res and .mres, respectively) are
written at the end of the simulation’s execution. For multi-configuration simulations, a configuration
result file (.res) is also created at the end of each configuration’s execution.
Each results file contains the following information as of the iteration or time step at which it is
written:
• The physics data (that is, the CFX Command Language specifications)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
CFD-Post File Menu
Note
• You must have ANSYS Workbench installed in order to be able to load ANSYS Meshing files (cmdb
and dsdb) into CFX-Pre or CFD-Post.
• CFD-Post does not support .cmdb files generated by the Meshing application prior to Release
11.0.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
When interpolating from cell-centered to node-centered data, the data at a given node is affected by
all surrounding cells. In order to get the correct behavior at boundary patches, a priority number is as-
signed to each patch by CFD-Post. This means that, for example in the above diagram, if the wall has
a higher priority number than the inlet, the value of the node is interpolated from the wall value of the
CFX solution. When considering a situation in 3D, the priority of all faces is read and interpolation occurs
from the face(s) with the highest priority. CFD-Post uses the same default values for every problem, so
there are cases in which accuracy can be compromised. These errors can be minimized by refining the
grid density in the region around problem areas.
Quantitative calculations can suffer a loss of accuracy due to the limitation described above. The results
of mass flow calculations should, therefore, be assumed to be approximations for the purposes of
quantitative analysis.
If TBPOST_COMP_X parameters (where X is the component number) are defined in the GCI file, either
on their own or within the TBPOST_COMP_LIST macro, they are used to obtain the list of turbo
components to load. Each defined component is treated as a separate domain inside CFD-Post, allowing
for their individual turbo initialization.
Note
If this list exists but is incomplete, only the defined components are loaded. If you cannot
load a turbo file, it may be due to an incompatibility in the component definition. As a
workaround, remove TBPOST related parameter and macro definitions from the GCI file.
• bcf files must be complete (must contain all domain and boundary condition definitions).
• When using the Turbo Post functionality, separate region names are required for the following 2D location
types:
– Hub
– Shroud
– Blade
– Inlet
– Outlet
– Periodic1
– Periodic2
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
CFD-Post File Menu
If these regions have not been specified separately (that is, hub and blade comprise of one region),
you will either need to recreate them in the CFX-TASCflow preprocessor or specify the turbo regions
from line locators. For details, see Initialize All Components (p. 295).
• Mass flow and torque are not written to rso files by CFX-TASCflow. These values are approximated in CFD-
Post and may not be suitable for use in a formal quantitative analysis.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
When ANSYS solver files are read together with CFX-Solver files, fluid dynamics and solid mechanics
results can be analyzed simultaneously. For details on how to load multiple files, see Load Results
Command (p. 91).
The deformations due to change in temperature and stress/strain of the mesh can be amplified by using
the Deformation option available by right-clicking the viewer background. For details, see CFD-Post
3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 78).
• If you are postprocessing ANSYS harmonic-analyzed files and all of the variable values are incorrectly dis-
playing as zeroes, you can set the environment variable CFDPOST_RST_SKIP_LAST_DATASET=1 to plot
the variables with nonzero values from the second-last dataset of the results file (which does not contain
frequency values of zero).
• CFD-Post does not fully support undefined and user-defined as values for RST units. In those cases, CFD-
Post assumes SI units.
If you want to use CFD-Post to postprocess an ANSYS RST file outside of ANSYS Workbench and you
do not want to have CFD-Post assume SI units, you can set an environment variable (CFD-
POST_RST_SHOW_UNITS_DIALOG=1) to cause the Solution Units dialog box (described in Solution
Units Dialog Box (p. 94)) to appear. Note that this will cause the Solution Units dialog box to appear
even when CFD-Post can read the units in the results file.
• The ANSYS Solver does not output minimum/maximum ranges for each of the calculated variables; these
ranges are calculated when the results file is loaded by CFD-Post. Calculating the range for a very large
problem would, however, require prohibitively large amounts of CPU time. As a result, range values are
calculated for the loaded time step only. This means that values that appear as global range, are in fact
ranges that exist for that time step only, at first. As more time steps are added, the global range is extended
accordingly. If you want to enable the calculation of true global ranges (and incur the potentially large CPU
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
CFD-Post File Menu
time each time you load a non-ANSYS CFX file), you can do this by selecting Edit > Options and selecting
Pre-calculate global variable ranges, under Files. For details, see Files (p. 137).
• CFD-Post plots only ANSYS variables that exist in RST files; unlike ANSYS, it will not calculate other variables
automatically. Therefore, some variables that you would expect to be able to plot (as in ANSYS) either will
be missing or will have all zero values in CFD-Post.
• RST files do not store data for principal stresses. There is a slight difference for principal stress calculated
in CFD-Post and ANSYS. CFD-Post calculates principal stresses on a node by averaging the stresses on each
element touching the node. However, ANSYS calculates principal stresses based on node-averaged stresses.
This difference can be minimized by the use of a finer mesh.
You can also configure ANSYS to calculate principal stresses the same way as CFD-Post by issuing
the command avprin, 1, and replotting the values.
• By default, an ANSYS results file does not contain the definitions of any components that you may have
created in the simulation set up and so these will not be available as regions for plotting in CFD-Post.
However, it is possible to produce an additional "components" file that does contain these definitions. If
CFD-Post finds a file with the name filename.cm in the same directory and with the same filename
(excluding the file extension) as the ANSYS results file, then it will read component definitions from this file.
For instance, if you are postprocessing the ANSYS results file OscillatingPlate.rst, CFD-Post will
look for the file OscillatingPlate.cm in the same directory to find component definitions. You can
get ANSYS to write the components file by including a command CMWRITE,<jobname>,cm in your ANSYS
input file, before the SOLVE command. If .cm files are to be loaded into CFD-Post, job names need to be
consistent across restarts, input file processing, and regular runs. If your ANSYS results file was produced by
an ANSYS Multi-field run that had its multi-field commands set up in CFX-Pre, then this command is already
added automatically into the resulting ANSYS input file as part of the input file processing.
• Components files (CM files) must have been output in blocked format (which is the default output format).
Refer to the ANSYS documentation to learn how to control the ANSYS output format.
All regions from components files are read as surfaces. If a region is volumetric, CFD-Post will read
the outer surface only.
CFD-Post will read only nodal components. Components that consist of elements will be ignored.
• CFD-Post can read a limited number of ANSYS results files that contain shell elements only. It depends on
the problem setup details as to whether a file can be successfully read or not. CFD-Post cannot read any
ANSYS results files that contain no 3D or shell elements.
• While the ANSYS MFX solver requires nodal and element solution data to be present in the results file for
all time steps on the FSI interface, it does not require this data in other places in the geometry. Excluding
that data means that the results file size can be reduced when you use ANSYS. When you use CFD-Post, on
the other hand, all data must be available at all nodes/elements for all time steps.
• When reading RST files, CFD-Post ignores mid-side nodes and duplicate nodes. The latter situation occurs
when a case has multiple bodies with matching meshes on the interfaces. The simulation picks up duplicate
nodes and plots accordingly, giving a discontinuous plot. However CFD-Post picks up only one of the nodes,
causing one domain to appear to spill into the next.
• In ANSYS, simulation characteristics such as maximum values are derived from actual local node values. In
CFD-Post values need to be presented on global nodes, therefore CFD-Post takes a simple average from all
shared elements' local values. When compared the two calculations will be similar, but not exactly the same.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
• ANSYS files that contain mid-edge nodes will cause mesh report to be inaccurate (the Connectivity range
may be reported as zero).
• When ANSYS electrical data is read in CFD-Post, units are not displayed for quantities such as Electric Potential
or for Electric Flux1.
• ANSYS Mechanical results file contains shell elements with data on both the top and bottom sides. CFD-Post
currently does not support separate data on the two sides. Only data from the top side will be read. If you
want to load results from the bottom side, you can set the environment variable CFDPOST_RST_READ_BOT-
TOM_SHELL_DATA.
• When exporting Heat Flux to ANSYS Mechanical, you should always select the fluid side of the interface.
Icepak exports the solution variables: Pressure, X/Y/Z velocities, and temperatures. In addition, for some
models you can select additional variables in Icepak to export to CFD-Post:
Thermal Cross
The cross product of the Heat Flux and the gradient of Temperature. You can use this to locate regions of
large heat flux vectors that are not aligned with high temperature gradients, therefore implying possible
regions for shorting heat flow.
Thermal Chokepoint
The dot product of Heat Flux and the gradient of Temperature. You can use this to locate regions of high
heat flux coupled with high thermal resistances.
Note
• By default, variable names are adjusted to conform to the CFX naming style, which may not always
be desirable. To preserve the original variable names in the file, open Edit > Options > CFD-Post
> Files and clear Translate variable names to CFX-Solver style names.
1
Electric Flux is the electric current density.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
CFD-Post File Menu
• Only one CGNS file can be postprocessed at a time; multiple simultaneous CGNS files are not
supported.
Important
Fluent .dat files may contain incompatible variables in CFD-Post. These variables, when
written by versions of Fluent earlier than 18.0 may show differences when displayed in CFD-
Post when compared to Fluent.
It is recommended to explicitly specify the quantities you want to postprocess when exporting
information from Fluent to CFD-Post via .cdat/.cdat.gz files. See Exporting to ANSYS
CFD-Post in the Fluent User's Guide for details on exporting .cdat/.cdat.gz files.
Alternatively, if additional files need to be avoided, you can select additional postprocessing
quantities to write to a Fluent .dat /.dat.gz file. See Setting Data File Quantities in the
Fluent User's Guide for details on how to select additional postprocessing quantities. Using
regular .dat/.dat.gz files may result in quantitative differences from Fluent while post-
processing in CFD-Post.
CFD-Post does not calculate derived variables, therefore only variables available in the file can be used.
However, you can export any variable to the dat or cdat files from Fluent 12.0 or later. For more in-
formation about these file types, see the ANSYS Fluent documentation.
Fluent files store variable values at the cell centers of the mesh. CFD-Post interpolates these values to
nodes using an interpolation method similar to the interpolation of CFX-4 files. For details, see Interpol-
ation of Results (p. 118). The valid file extensions are listed in the File type setting of the Load Results
File dialog box.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
In CFD-Post, a wall boundary takes precedence over other boundaries, so all wall nodes will have wall
values irrespective of whether they are on any other boundary.
Note
You must select only one file from a sequence of related Fluent files in the Load dialog box
(normally the final timestep's dat or cdat file); other related files are loaded automatically.
• Grid interfaces from Fluent versions 6.3 and older are not supported by CFD-Post. If your .cas file has old
grid interfaces, read the .cas and .dat file into the Fluent Release 12.0 (or later), run at least one iteration,
and save the file to change to the new grid interfaces. This will convert grid interfaces to use the virtual
polygon method and make the file readable in CFD-Post. Attempting to read old grid interfaces may cause
CFD-Post to exit.
• To postprocess forces or fluxes using the DBNS solver of Fluent for cases from versions prior to Release 12.0,
you must read the case into Fluent Release 12.0 (or later), iterate at least once, and then write out the .cas
and .dat files.
• Holes may appear in Planes/iso-surfaces created using old Fluent mesh/case files (from earlier than Release
14.5) for hex-core/cut-cell mesh cases.
• In ANSYS Fluent, any element can have any number of faces. The maximum number of nodes in a polyhedron
element is 256 and in a polygon face is 128 (however the contour-creation algorithm has a limit of 64 nodes
per face).
• Plots created in CFD-Post that are based on node values (not cell/face values) can have undesired smoothing
of results on the edges where nodes are shared by two objects.
• CFD-Post does not smooth out values across non-conformal interface boundaries; that is, there must be a
1-1 mapping of nodes across the interface. As a result, contour and color plots as well as iso-surfaces are
discontinuous across these interfaces. Therefore, the node values displayed by CFD-Post at non-conformal
interfaces may differ from those shown by Fluent.
• Case comparison is not available for cell based contours of Fluent results.
File-based Limitations
• CFD-Post does not support UDNM (User-Defined Node Memory) variables from Fluent.
• Unsteady statistic variables (such as Mean X Velocity and RMS Static Pressure) are not to be
read from the standard DAT file. If needed, you can export these variables explicitly in a CDAT file or append
the variables to the DAT file.
• For Fluent files, the gradients computed by CFD-Post are discontinuous across domains.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
CFD-Post File Menu
• CFD-Post can read zone-motion variables (origin, axis, omega, grid-velocity) on profile boundaries from
Fluent files only if the variables are constants. For cases where any of these values are specified as non-
constants, CFD-Post ignores the variable. In such conditions, CFD-Post cannot transform the velocity from
absolute to the relative frame or the reverse. Other dependent variables (such as Mach Number and Vorticity)
will not be available unless explicitly exported from Fluent using either a .cdat file or data file options.
There will be a warning message issued when these files are read.
• For Fluent files using the energy model, Heat Flux is available for all boundaries and Wall Heat Flux is available
only for walls. The values of these two variables will be same on walls.
• You need to be careful when choosing geometry names in Fluent when the file will be read in CFD-Post.
The geometry names must not contain special characters such as '-', '|', and ':'. All such characters will be
replaced by a space (which is allowed in names in CFD-Post).
• CFD-Post can read files written from Fluent, but the reading of mesh files written from TGrid or GAMBIT is
not supported and may cause CFD-Post to terminate abnormally.
• CFD-Post reads User-Defined Materials (UDM) and User-Defined Scalars (UDS) as follows:
– When .cas/.dat files are read into CFD-Post, UDM/UDS variables will appear with names as "User
Defined Memory 0"/"Scalar 0".
– When .cas/.dat files are read into CFD-Post, CFD-Post will show all UDM/UDS variables that were ex-
ported to the CDAT file.
• Fluent .cas, .dat, and .cdat files do not contain the units for user-defined scalars, user-defined memory,
or custom field functions, so these will be dimensionless in CFD-Post.
• CFD-Post cannot import Boundary Mesh files, even though Boundary Mesh files have the .msh file extension.
• CFD-Post can read Fluent case files that have imprinted surfaces defined in them. However, the imprinted
surfaces are ignored in CFD-Post.
General Limitations
• Wall Shear Stress and its components should not be added as Additional Quantities to be written in a
Fluent .dat file. This causes CFD-Post to report incorrect values for Wall Shear Stress. Wall Shear Stress
values are always present in .dat files and CFD-Post uses them by default to report correct values.
• When reading a Fluent results file, CFD-Post may report an incorrect sign for mass flow on a conformal in-
ternal boundary (known as an "interior" type in Fluent) that is located at the boundary between two domains.
To determine the direction of mass flow, use a CEL expression based on the normalized dot product of the
local velocity and the face normal:
• For axisymmetric cases, the point values in CFD-Post may differ from values reported in Fluent due to the
extrusion of the 2D domain in the theta direction.
• When selecting to output additional variables in a DAT file in Fluent (via the Data File Quantities panel), a
variable is written to the user-specified section of a DAT file. CFD-Post will check to see if the same variable
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
is available in the basic section of the DAT file. If so, the variable from the basic section will not be read in
CFD-Post; only the variables from the user-specified section of the DAT file will be read.
• Value ranges reported by the function calculator may differ from the values shown by a contour. The function
calculator results are based on cell/face values while contours show values based on either cell/face values
or node values; for details, see Variable Location: Vertex and Face Options (p. 190).
• Certain real gas properties are not available in CFD-Post for use: gas constant, molecular viscosity, specific
heat, and sound speed.
• The variable Boundary Heat Flux Sensible is available only for boundary types velocity-inlet, mass-flow-inlet,
pressure-inlet, pressure-outlet, pressure-far-field, and outflow.
• For transient Fluent cases, there is no support for adding or removing time steps in the timestep selector.
• There may be problems postprocessing transient Fluent cases that involve boundary name or type changes
at intermediate time steps.
• There is no support for loading of a subset of domains. All domains are always loaded.
• A DBNS solver with laminar flow will have zero shear stress on all walls. Force calculations will not include
viscous component in such cases.
• CFD-Post will not display any shear stress values on coupled non-conformal interfaces as shear stresses are
undefined on such interfaces.
• CFD-Post cannot read Fluent cases that have CAS and DAT files output in different directories.
• You cannot use X, Y, or Z variables in expressions or plots in moving mesh transient cases. For example, instead
of an Isosurface of X, use a YZ Plane.
• Surface streamlines cannot be created on wall boundaries as wall velocities are zero. The recommendation
is to create the streamline based on the Wall Shear vector. Ensure that Wall Shear is in the file; if it is not,
return to Fluent and export that variable.
Alternatively, you can use the near wall velocity for streamlines (and other plots) by setting CFD-
POST_BOUNDARY_DATA_FROM_ELEMENTS before running CFD-Post.
In the regions where the mesh is coarse and vector variable gradients are steep, streamlines in CFD-
Post may hit walls earlier than similar streamlines in Fluent. This is due to a difference in computation
methods, and can be avoided by refining the mesh.
• Molar Weight will always have units of kg/mol in CFD-Post, but units of kg/kmol in Fluent. This will be true
for all quantities involving 'mol' or 'kmol' in units.
To learn how to control the units displayed by CFD-Post, see Setting the Display Units (p. 142).
• When creating Streamlines for Dual Cell heat exchanged Fluent cases, exclude Auxiliary Fluid domains from
the Domains list as these domains can cause the streamlines to terminate too early.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
CFD-Post File Menu
• A line in CFD-Post of type Sample gives results that match with Fluent's 'line' if the environment variable
CFDPOST_BOUNDARY_DATA_FROM_ELEMENTS is set to 1. However, a line in CFD-Post of type Cut gives
results that do not match with Fluent's 'rake' as the former in infinite and the latter is clipped.
• Plots of velocity vectors on wall boundaries do not match between CFD-Post and Fluent. Fluent always uses
adjacent cell velocity for plotting vectors whereas CFD-Post uses node velocity (interpolated from cell/face
values).
• The results of calculations by CFD-Post for Fluent 2D cases are for a reference-depth from the Fluent case
file. For axisymmetric cases, the reference-depth is 2*pi; that is, the results calculations are for the complete
cylindrical region, and not what is shown in the viewer (which is a sector from the complete cylinder). This
matches the behavior of Fluent.
Results will be consistent for all quantitative calculations on all locations. For example, a slice plane
will be assumed to be cutting the full cylinder.
• CFD-Post reads Total Pressure data from the Fluent results file if this quantity exists. If the data is not supplied
in the file, this quantity is not calculated by CFD-Post.
• Averaging of vector quantities to nodes differs between CFD-Post and Fluent. In Fluent, vector magnitudes
are averaged to nodes explicitly; in CFD-Post, only vector components are averaged to nodes, while the
magnitude is calculated from the components at the nodes. The two magnitudes will differ in cases with
sharp vector gradients or high face angles (usually due to a coarse mesh).
For example, if a node has four faces attached that have shear stresses in directions radially away
from the node, in CFD-Post the shear stress values at the node will be much smaller in magnitude
compared with the face stresses because the stresses in opposite directions cancel out. In Fluent, the
direction is ignored and only magnitude is taken into account while calculating the stress magnitude
at the node.
Plots cannot display cell or face data directly, only nodal averages. However, cell and face data will
be used in quantitative reports on volumes, boundaries, planes, iso clips, and isosurfaces (averages,
mass flows, integrals). Lines, polyline, and points will use only nodal averages for quantitative calcu-
lations.
• Velocity magnitude values for Fluent in CFD-Post are not in good agreement with Fluent results for cases
with multiple-frame-of-reference or sliding-mesh models.
– The "Velocity in Stn Frame" plotted in CFD-Post is equivalent to "Velocity Magnitude" in Fluent. Similarly,
other quantities dependent on Velocity such as Total Pressure or Total Temperature will have the suffix
"in Stn Frame" (e.g. Total Temperature in Stn Frame corresponding to Total Temperature) for stationary
frame variables in Fluent. Variables in the relative frame of motion will be without this suffix.
– There is no Fluent equivalent for the CFD-Post variable "Velocity" as this represents a relative velocity in
the local reference frame of the domain (which is not available for postprocessing in Fluent).
– There is no CFD-Post equivalent for Fluent's "Relative Velocity". In Fluent, "Relative Velocity" is always rel-
ative to a global frame of reference (which you can select in Fluent Reference Values panel; if no reference
frame is selected, an “Absolute Velocity” is used, not a “Reference Velocity”).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
– When loading Fluent results, CFD-Post does not calculate global ranges by default as this would be too
time-consuming (there is a warning to this effect when you load a Fluent case). However, when the variable
is used for the first time (for example, when it is plotted), and as timesteps are loaded, the global range
should be continually updated.
• For cases with 1:1 interfaces, due to a difference in the handling on nodes at these interfaces, the number
of nodes reported by CFD-Post will be different than the number reported by Fluent. However, the number
of cells should match.
• In the cavitation model in Fluent, the minimum value for Pressure is limited by the cavitation pressure; (this
is not done in CFD-Post).
• For the cavitation model, there are differences in the volume fraction values between Fluent and CFD-Post.
• For some cases (for example, shell conduction model), the number of cells/elements reported by Fluent is
more than that of CFD-Post. This difference is due to the additional cells Fluent creates internally for solving
some physics; these are never written into the case file. Fluent reports include these cells as well.
• CFD-Post and Fluent may use different sources of data when generating contour plots. For details, see
Variable Location: Vertex and Face Options (p. 190).
• CFD-Post and Fluent display contours differently in the vicinity of a hanging node. Fluent takes values from
cells only on one side, causing a discontinuity of contours. In CFD-Post, the hanging node is made to be a
conformal node and takes values from cells on both sides, making a smoother contour.
• A periodic surface in Fluent is actually a pair of surfaces. In CFD-Post this pair appears as a Periodic object
and a corresponding Periodic Shadow. When looking at quantitative results in CFD-Post, you need to look
at a surface group that contains the “periodic/periodic-shadow” to see output that is in agreement with
Fluent's results.
• Field variables may be discontinuous across an interface that joins domains of differing porosity. Variable
values on the interface boundaries are not averaged across the interface. You can inspect variable values
on each side of the interface separately.
• There may be substantial differences between gradients calculated in the Fluent solver and gradients calcu-
lated in CFD-Post. The Fluent solver uses options such as boundary treatments and limiters to calculate
gradients; CFD-Post calculates gradients independently of the Fluent solver, and does not have access to
all of the same data.
The gradients computed by the Fluent solver can be transferred into CFD-Post by exporting them as
variables and then loading them into CFD-Post.
• Also see Quantitative Differences Between CFD-Post and Fluent (p. 130).
Turbo Limitations
• CFD-Post can initialize turbo space only for domains that are enclosed with inlet, outlet, hub, and shroud
regions. For more complex geometries you must set up the problem such that the region of interest is isolated
into a separate domain that can be initialized in CFD-Post.
• When choosing a report template for a Fluent turbo report, choose Release 12 templates (which do not
have the word “Rotor” in the template name).
Report template that have “Rotor” in the template name are from Release 11 and require variables
that are not available from Fluent turbo files.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
CFD-Post File Menu
• For rotating machinery applications, identification of components and ordering, regions, rotation axis,
number of passages, and interfaces cannot be done automatically; you must supply this information on the
Turbo initialization panel. When generating turbo reports, select variables, instance transforms, and expres-
sions will require manual updates; for details see Procedures for Using Turbo Reports when Turbomachinery
Data is Missing (p. 41).
• In cases where forces on surfaces are transferred between Fluent and Mechanical, the forces displayed on
the surface are read directly from the Fluent results file, while the forces on the corresponding mechanical
surface are averaged to the nodes. When viewed in CFD-Post, the values of the surface and mechanical
forces will not match.
• Some Polyflow and FIDAP cases may have interior surfaces that are read into CFD-Post as boundaries. Unlike
other boundaries, these "interior boundaries" cannot be used to create Polyline objects by intersecting them
with a slice plane.
• CFX Results files generated by Polyflow do not contain all the necessary information required for some
automatic calculations in CFD-Post, including force and torque functions.
• If particle track files from Fluent were written with rpvar dpm/io/cfd-post/export-int64? set to #t (default is
#f ), then, in order for CFD-Post to read the particle track files, you must have environment variable CFX
POST_READ_64BIT_FLUENT_PARTICLE_IDS set to 1.
• The size of exported files and the intermediate history file is limited to 2 GB on architectures that have
sizeof(long)==4 (for example: win64, ntx86, and lnx86).
• When Fluent particle tracks cross periodic boundaries, there will be a gap between the point on one side
of the periodic boundary and the point on the other side. This is most visible if instancing is enabled, but
appears only in transient cases.
• CFD-Post displays particle tracks as segments, whereas ANSYS Fluent displays particle tracks as points. This
is particularly shown by transient cases when viewing tracks for a particular timestep: CFD-Post displays
tracks as segments of the track from the previous timestep to the current timestep, while ANSYS Fluent
shows points at the current timestep. Because of this, the range of the color variable will include data that
is not included by ANSYS Fluent when displaying particle tracks.
• In a case with two domains, the nodes on the boundary in Fluent will get their values from the domain that
has the higher priority; CFD-Post uses the average of the boundary values from both domains.
• If Volume Fraction is not available in the list of variables for multiphase Fluent cases, the phase forces reported
by CFD-Post will be same as the total force.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Types Used and Produced by CFD-Post
• Wall Heat Flux values reported by CFD-Post for moving and deforming meshes cases will not match those
for Fluent. This is because Fluent adds pressure work to get the energy balance.
• For some cases, the fluxes (Mass Flow()@<surface> or AreaInt(Boundary Heat Flux)@<surface>) from CFD-
Post are different from the values reported by Flux Reports panel from Fluent. This is due to some additional
physics model-based calculations done by Fluent that are not available in CFD-Post. However, you can use
the Fluent Surface Integral or Volume Integral panel results for comparison with CFD-Post.
• The Function Calculator may give variable averages on slice planes, isosurfaces, and interiors that are different
from those given by Fluent. These differences may occur when the surface is cutting through a mesh face
that joins two mesh elements. In this situation, CFD-Post may use the element-center data from a different
element than Fluent uses. Note that as both elements are equally valid choices, both calculations are correct.
• Due to differences between Fluent and CFD-Post in the handling of vector quantities, velocity values can
be different on 'interior' zones (conformal domain interfaces).
• In CFD-Post, on boundaries that have zero velocity, Total Temperature and Total Pressure will have same
values as Temperature and Pressure, respectively (as expected). In Fluent, Total Temperature is different
from Temperature for boundaries that have zero velocity; similar differences apply between Total Pressure
and Pressure. This is a limitation in Fluent.
If you export 'Total Pressure' from Fluent, the CFD-Post results will be closer to what Fluent shows.
• On boundaries, CFD-Post produces more accurate quantitative results involving geometric variables (such
as X, Y, Z) than Fluent reports. This is because Fluent uses geometric variable data from adjacent cell centers
instead of the boundary face centers. However, you can get CFD-Post results to match Fluent results exactly
by setting the environment variable CFDPOST_MATCH_FLUENT_RESULTS to 1 before running CFD-Post.
• There are very small differences between Fluent and CFD-Post in the way that area is calculated for
axisymmetric cases; this area is used in quantitative functions. Fluent calculates the area for any axisymmetric
case as , where r is centroid-y of the facet. CFD-Post extrudes the 2D geometry to create a 3D wedge
(of wedge angle 7.5°) then calculates the area by repeating the wedge to create a 360° cylinder. This is
similar to approximating the perimeter of a circle by measuring the perimeter of an inscribed uniform
polygon.
• CFD-Post results match with Fluent "Vertex" values instead of "Facet" values for Species Reaction and VOF
cases. To have results from CFD-Post match results from Fluent, set the environment variable CFD-
POST_BOUNDARY_DATA_FROM_ELEMENTS to 1.
• The Global variable range for a Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient is incorrectly reported as zero; use the Local
variable range instead.
• For the cavitation model, there are differences in values for volume fraction and pressure between Fluent
and CFD-Post. In CFD-Post, pressure values are not clipped to the cavitation pressure. The values for pressure
and volume fraction displayed in Fluent are correct.
• Face/cell data is not available on any surface that was exported from Fluent and then subsequently used
as a location in CFD-Post. Only nodal values are used for all qualitative (contours/vector) as well as quantit-
ative purposes. It is expected that there may be differences in quantitative results when compared to Fluent.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
CFD-Post File Menu
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 8: CFD-Post Monitor Menu
The Monitor menu enables you to view solution data while the solver is executing. To use this feature,
you must have predefined a User Location in CFX-Pre and set up CFX-Pre to output variable data onto
a Monitor Surface. For more information, see Monitor Surfaces: Frame Overview in the CFX-Pre User's
Guide.
Note
4. Click Choose.
You can now monitor the run in CFD-Post on your predefined Monitor Surface using the following op-
tions.
After selecting Start Auto Update, all user actions related to object creation and editing are disabled.
When the solver run in finished, the last iteration is read into CFD-Post, and all user actions are made
available to you.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
CFD-Post Monitor Menu
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 9: CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)
Undo and Redo commands are available in the Edit menu. Additionally, there are a variety of options
that can be set to customize the software.
In stand-alone mode, the undo stack is cleared whenever a New, Open, or Close action occurs. Similarly,
when using CFX-Pre/CFD-Post from within ANSYS Workbench, the undo stack is cleared in CFX-Pre/CFD-
Post after the application receives commands from ANSYS Workbench.
• Press Ctrl + Z
Note
• Some commands that you issue have multiple components. For example, when you create some
objects the software creates the object and sets the visibility of the object on (in two separate
operations). Thus, when you perform an undo operation in such a situation, you are setting the
visibility of the object off; you must choose undo a second time to “uncreate” the object.
The redo feature is used to do an action that you have just undone using the Undo command. Issue
the Redo command by doing any of the following:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)
• Press Ctrl + Y
If desired, you can use the CFX Defaults or the Workbench Defaults buttons at the bottom of
the dialog box to quickly set CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver Manager, and CFD-Post to have the standard
appearance and operation of CFX or Workbench respectively. The only CFD-Post settings that are
affected by these buttons are:
3. Click OK.
Your changes are generally implemented immediately. However, when changing the following
user preferences, it will be necessary to restart CFD-Post for the setting to take effect:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog
By default the tolerance "layer" is 0.2% of the domain. You can set the value to 0 to turn the Interpolation
Tolerance off.
Note that this value should be set to a value less than half the size of the smallest openings or features
of the domain geometry. This prevents a point from being detected in two overlapping Interpolation
Tolerance regions.
If the Interpolation Tolerance setting is too high, there could be undefined nodes and malformed
elements in the virtual layer, especially around sharply-contoured regions of the domain surface.
Changes to the interpolation tolerance can affect how data is interpolated onto objects such as Sample
Planes, Polylines, User surfaces, Surfaces of Rotation, and so on. Each of these objects, depending on
how close the defined points are to the domain, may have slightly changed behavior, depending on
how close to the domain the points are defined.
Automatic
This is the default option. CFD-Post displays the rotated position of the rotating locations considering the
currently-loaded timestep. CFD-Post uses the rotated position for a domain (and associated locations such
as domain boundaries) only if the domain touches a transient rotor-stator interface. The rotated position
for a Monitor Surface is always used.
Always rotate
CFD-Post displays the rotated position of the rotating locations applicable to the currently-loaded timestep.
Domains and Monitor Surfaces are always displayed in their rotated position regardless of any interfaces
in the setup.
Never rotate
CFD-Post always uses the initial position of the rotating domains and Monitor Surfaces.
Because the rotating domains may be in a rotated position when they are loaded into CFD-Post for
postprocessing, force calculations made on the rotating domains can have different results depending
on the setting of the option above.
9.2.1.4. Files
Changes made in this panel will take effect the next time you load a file.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)
• Warn prior to loading the same results file more than once controls whether you are warned when you
attempt to load a file that is already loaded. The warning appears when both the filename and the file contents
are the same as a currently loaded file.
• Select Show domain selector before load to enable you to choose which domains to load when more
than one domain exists in the results file. If this option is turned off, then all domains will be loaded next
time you load a results file.
• Under CFX Mass Flow Expression Method Used for Physical Surfaces: select an option to control how
mass flow data is calculated (for example by the massFlow, massFlowAve, and massFlowAveAbs
functions):
– Use surface shape approximated by the nearest control volume faces (not recommended for cases
with GGI interfaces)
This method can provide more accurate massFlow rates. However, it may provide inaccurate results
if the surface over which the mass flow is evaluated crosses a GGI interface.
– Use surface mass flows computed from interpolated nodal values (recommended for general cases)
This method is recommended because the results do not suffer if the surface over which the mass
flow is evaluated crosses a GGI interface.
• When CFX Transient:Load missing variables from nearest FULL time step is cleared, it makes all variables
that are not written to the partial results file undefined for the current timestep. When selected, CFD-Post
loads the missing variables from the nearest full results file. This option is used when partial transient results
files do not contain all of the variables calculated by the CFX-Solver. By default, these variables will be un-
defined (but still visible in the variables list) for the current timestep.
Important
Take care when using this option because values that are plotted may not apply to the
current timestep.
• Select CFX Turbo:Don’t prompt to auto-load reports to prevent CFD-Post from automatically asking you
if you want to load a report upon loading results files.
• Select CFX:Don't load mesh regions if you do not want to have region definitions loaded when you load
a file that contains them.
• Clear Files other than CFX:Pre-calculate global variable ranges to turn off the calculation of all variable
ranges.
• Files other than CFX:Translate variable names to CFX-Solver style names converts variable names from
other results files into CFX variable names. (For example, the variable P in a CFX-TASCflow file will be con-
verted to Pressure.)
Important
– By default, CFD-Post will not modify the variable names in the .rso file. If you want to use all
of the embedded CFD-Post macros and calculation options, you will need to convert variable
names to CFX types.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog
– In order to use the Turbo Charts feature with Fluent files, you must have Translate variable
names to CFX-Solver style names selected.
The complete list of translated variables is given in Variable Translation (p. 120).
• Fluent:Load interior face zones controls whether or not interior face zones are displayed.
Fluent cases contain cell zones and face zones. (Cell zones are similar to element sets in CFD-Post,
and face zones are similar to face sets.) All cell zones are read into CFD-Post and are listed as domains.
Of the face zones, by default only those that bound a cell-zone/domain are shown in CFD-Post1.
However, Fluent meshes can also contain 'interior' face zones that are useful for postprocessing. In-
terior face zones are inside a domain and do not form a boundary of the domain. To see interior face
zones, enable Load interior face zones.
Note
The names of 'interior' zones in CFD-Post are kept same as that in Fluent, except that
characters that are not allowed in CFD-Post (such as '-', ':' and so on) are replaced by space
characters.
• Fluent: Show warning for incompatible variables in old files controls whether a message box will appear
if the Fluent .dat file you are loading contains incompatible variables. These variables, when written by
versions of Fluent earlier than 18.0 may show differences when displayed in CFD-Post when compared to
Fluent. For details, see Exporting to ANSYS CFD-Post.
The solution units assumed, which are read when the file was loaded, are displayed on the right. When
files that do not store solution units (such as CFX-4 dump files, CFX-TASC files, Fluent files, or ANSYS
results files) are loaded, you will be prompted to specify the solution units. You can enable the Don't
prompt for Solution Units before loading results toggle to suppress this prompt, in which case the
default units of kilograms, meters, seconds, Kelvin, and radians will be used.
The units shown on this dialog box are not necessarily those used by CFD-Post, but are the solution
units used in the currently loaded file. The units used by CFD-Post are set elsewhere; for details, see
Setting the Display Units (p. 142). CFD-Post needs to know the solution units used in the file so that it
can convert them to the units specified. When CFX files are loaded into CFD-Post, the solution units
that were used by the CFX-Solver are automatically read from the file. For this reason, Don’t prompt
for Solution Units before loading results is ignored when loading CFX files and selected by default
for other file types.
1
CFD-Post will never list:
– Any other zones that cannot be displayed from the Mesh Display panel in Fluent.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)
When postprocessing a results file in CFD-Post, the units used are not necessarily those used in the
results file. CFD-Post will convert to your preferred units.
Note
In CFD-Post, the temperature solution units must be an absolute scale (for example, Kelvin
[K] or Rankine [R]); you cannot use Celsius and Fahrenheit. Temperature quantities elsewhere
in ANSYS CFX can be set in Celsius and Fahrenheit.
9.2.1.6. Turbo
These settings are related to turbomachinery simulations loaded into CFD-Post, and are mostly self-ex-
planatory.
9.2.1.7. Viewer
To configure the viewer, right-click the viewer and select Viewer Options.
• Surface Mesh: Displays the surface mesh for selected regions using lines.
Note
When you load a state file, the highlighting is dictated by the setting that is stored in the
case, rather than by the current preferences setting.
9.2.1.7.2. Background
Set Mode to Color or Image.
9.2.1.7.2.1. Color
Use Color Type to set either a solid color or a gradient of colors; use Color to set the color (and Color
2 for gradients).
9.2.1.7.2.2. Image
If selecting a custom image, choose an image file and a type of mapping. Image types that are supported
include *.bmp (24-bit BMP only), *.jpg, *.png, and *.ppm. Mapping options are Flat and
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog
Spherical. Flat maps are stationary while spherical maps surround the virtual environment and rotate
with the objects in the viewer.
Custom images have some restrictions: all background images and textures sent to the viewer must be
square and must have dimensions that are powers of 2 (for example, 512 x 512 or 1024 x 1024).
If the dimensions of your background image is not a power of 2, the viewer sizes the image to be a
power of 2 by doing bicubic resampling.
To make the background image square, transparent pixels are added to the smaller dimension to make
it the same as the larger dimension. The transparent pixels enable you to see the regular viewer back-
ground, which gives you control over what fill color your background has.
Select or clear Axis Visibility or Ruler Visibility to show or hide the axis indicator or ruler in the
viewer.
9.2.1.7.4. Stereo
See Stereo Viewer (p. 86).
9.2.1.8. Advanced
Under Cmd Timeout, specify the minimum time between registered mouse clicks, in milliseconds.
9.2.1.9. ANSYS Import: Read 3D elements when CDB file has both 2D and 3D types
Enable this setting to ensure that 3D elements are read when a CDB file being imported has both 2D
and 3D elements.
Note
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
CFD-Post Edit Menu and Options (Preferences)
Temporary directory
To set a temporary directory, click Browse to find a convenient directory where the autosave feature
will save state files.
9.2.2.1. Appearance
The appearance of the user interface can be controlled from the Appearance options. The default user
interface style will be set to that of your machine. For example, on Windows, the user interface has a
Windows look to it. If, for example, a Motif appearance to the user interface is preferred, select to use
this instead of the Windows style.
2. For Font and Formatted Font, specify the fonts to use in the application.
Note
It is important not to set the font size too high (over 24 pt. is not recommended) or the
dialog boxes may become difficult to read. Setting the font size too small may cause
some portions of the text to not be visible on monitors set at low resolutions. It is also
important not to set the font to a family such as Webdings, Wingdings, Symbols, or
similar type faces, or the dialog boxes become illegible.
Double Buffering is a feature supported by most OpenGL implementations. It provides two complete
color buffers that swap between each other to animate graphics smoothly. If your implementation
of OpenGL does not support double buffering, you can clear this check box.
By default, zoom is restricted to prevent graphics problems related to depth sorting. Selecting
Unlimited Zoom allows an unrestricted zoom.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Setting Preferences with the Options Dialog
are stored in results files). For example, if your preferred units are SI and you load a results file that
contains data in British Technical units, the values you see in CFD-Post will be in SI.
1. Under System, select the unit system to use. Unit systems are sets of quantity types for mass, length,
time, and so on.
The options under System include SI, CGS, English Engineering, British Technical,
US Customary, US Engineering, or Custom. Only Custom enables you to redefine a
quantity type (for example, to use inches for the dimensions in a file that otherwise used SI units).
The most common quantity types appear in the main Options dialog box; to see all quantity types,
click More Units.
If Always convert units to Preferred Units is selected, the units of entered quantities are imme-
diately converted to those set in this dialog box.
For example, if you have set Velocity to [m s^-1] in this dialog box to make that the preferred
velocity unit, and elsewhere you enter 20 [mile hr^-1] for a velocity quantity, the entered
value is immediately converted and displayed as 8.94078 [m s^-1].
• The units presented on this dialog box, which control the default units presented in the user interface, as
well as the units used for mesh transformation.
• The solution units; for details, see CFD-Post Solution Units (p. 139).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 10: CFD-Post Session Menu
Session files contain a record of the commands issued during a CFD-Post session. The actions that cause
commands to be written to a session file include:
• Viewer manipulation performed using the commands available by right-clicking in the viewer window.
• Creation of expressions.
• Creation of new objects and changes to an object committed by clicking OK or Apply on any of the panels
available from the Tools and Insert menus/toolbars.
1. Browse to the directory in which you want to create the session file, and then enter a name for the file
ending with a .cse (CFD-Post) extension.
This will not start recording to the session file. To start recording, you must select Session > Start
Recording.
If you create more than one session file during a CFD-Post session, the most recently created file is the
current session file by default. You can set a different file to be the current session file by selecting an
existing file from the New Session > Set Session File window and then clicking Save. Because the file
exists, a warning dialog box appears:
• If you select Overwrite, the existing session file is deleted and a new file is created in its place.
• If you select Append, commands will be added to the end of the existing session file when recording begins.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
CFD-Post Session Menu
Important
A session file cannot be played if it contains an Undo command. To run a session file that
contains an Undo command, first edit the session file to remove the command.
Important
Existing objects with the same name as objects defined in the session file are replaced by
those in the session file (for example, if Plane 1 exists in this CFD-Post session file, playing
the session file will overwrite any existing object with the name Plane 1).
2. In the Play Session File dialog box, browse to the directory containing the session file and select the file
you want to play.
3. Click Open to play the session file. The commands listed in the selected session file are executed. Existing
objects with the same name as objects defined in the session file are replaced by those in the session file.
Note
You can play session files in stand-alone CFD-Post, but not in CFD-Post in ANSYS Workbench.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 11: CFD-Post Insert Menu
The Insert menu in CFD-Post is used to create new objects (such as locators, tables, charts, and so on),
variables, and expressions.
A locator is a place or object that another object uses to plot or calculate values. For example, if you
were to select a plane from which to start a streamline, the plane would be a locator.
Interpolation in CFD-Post
For both plots and quantitative evaluation, iso clip and user surface locators interpolate values
using general (tri-liner) interpolation from mesh nodes to surface nodes. Planes and isosurfaces
use more accurate "edge interpolation" for plots and, in Fluent cases, element-to-face inter-
polation for quantitative evaluation (such as area averages). Similarly, boundaries directly
map to mesh nodes or faces. Consequently, quantitative operations on a user surface or on
an iso clip that is based on a mesh density location (slice plane, isosurface, or boundary), are
not going to evaluate to precisely the same number as the underlying mesh density location.
For Transient Blade Row cases, transient statistics for boundary-only variables (such as Force,
Mass Flow, Heat Flux) are not available on the following postprocessing locators (points,
lines, cut-planes, isosurfaces, and iso clips).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Click OK on the dialog box to open the relevant details view in the Outline workspace. A new object
will be created in the database when you click Apply in the details view of the location object.
Tip
You can also access locator objects from the Location icon on the toolbar.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Point.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
Note
For a case with immersed solids, the setting All Domains refers to all domains except the
immersed solids. To display all of the domains in a case that contains immersed solids, click
the Location Editor icon and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting All Domains and
All Immersed Solids.
Variables used for plots or calculations on immersed solid domain boundaries are not taken
from the immersed solid domain; instead, they are interpolated from the fluid/porous domain
in which the solid is immersed. The accuracy of such interpolation is dependent on the mesh
densities of both the fluid/porous domain and the surface of the immersed solid domain.
To visualize, or perform computations with, variables that are associated with the immersed
solid domain, use slice planes, user surfaces, or other locators that are offset into the immersed
solid domain, and set the applicable Domains setting to refer to the immersed solid domain.
11.1.1.1.2. Definition
11.1.1.1.2.1. Method
Option Description
XYZ Enables you to set a coordinate in 3D space for the
Point.
Node Number Enables you to select a node to which to attach the
Point.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Option Description
Variable Places the Point at the selected variable’s lowest value.
Minimum
Select whether the object you want to plot will be
based on hybrid or conservative values. For details,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
Variable Places the Point at the selected variable’s greatest
Maximum value.
Note
You can move only points that have been specified with the XYZ option.
11.1.1.1.2.2. Point
Point is available only if the XYZ option is selected. The Point setting specifies the Cartesian coordinates
for the Point object. Once the point is created, you can use the mouse pointer to drag the point around
in the domain. For details, see Picking Mode (p. 82).
Node Number is available only if the Node Number Method is selected. The Node Number setting
specifies at which node to place the Point object. When more than one domain is selected, a point is
created for the specified node number in each domain (if it exists). If the node number does not exist
in one domain but exists in another, you should select only the domain in which the node exists or an
error message will be displayed.
11.1.1.1.2.4. Location
Location is available only if the Variable Minimum or the Variable Maximum options are selected.
The Location setting specifies an object for the Point to be located in. When more than one domain
is selected, a point is created for the minimum or maximum value of the variable within each domain.
11.1.1.1.2.5. Variable
Variable is available only if the Variable Minimum or the Variable Maximum options are selected.
The Variable setting selects the variable to be used to find the maximum or minimum point.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Symbol Description
Crosshair A 3D “+” sign.
Octahedron A 3D diamond that has eight faces.
Cube A box.
Ball A sphere.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Point Cloud.
11.1.2.1.2. Definition
11.1.2.1.2.1. Locations
The Locations setting selects the location or locations in which the point cloud is created.
Tip
Click Location Editor to open the Location Selector dialog box, which displays the
complete list of available locations.
11.1.2.1.2.2. Sampling
Option Description
Equally Generates points with roughly the same distance
Spaced between them.
Rectangular Generates a rectangular grid of points on the surface.
Grid This option should be used only on flat surfaces.
Vertex Generates the points on the vertices of the mesh. The
maximum number of points is the total number of
vertices in the mesh.
Face Center Generates the points at the center of the mesh faces.
The maximum number of points is the total number
of faces in the mesh.
Free Edge Generates the points on the outer edge at the center
of the edge segments.
Random Generates the points randomly. If the seed is positive,
the point distribution can be reproduced.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
11.1.2.1.2.3. # of Points
# of Points is available only when either the Equally Spaced or Random option is selected. The #
of Points setting specifies the number of equally spaced points you want generated on the surface of
the mesh.
For the Equally Spaced option, the actual number of points generated is guided by the provided
# of Points but may not be exactly equal to this.
11.1.2.1.2.4. Spacing
Spacing is available only when the Rectangular Grid option is selected. The Spacing setting
specifies a value that represents a fraction of the maximum domain extent. For example, if your domain
has a maximum extent of 1 [m] and a Spacing of 0.1 was used, a rectangular grid with 0.1 [m]
spacing would be created.
Aspect Ratio is available only when the Rectangular Grid option is selected. The Aspect Ratio
setting stretches the rectangle in a direction parallel to the grid axes. If a value less than one is entered,
the grid will be stretched in one direction. If a value greater than one is entered, the grid will be stretched
in the direction perpendicular to the previous direction.
Grid Angle is available only when the Rectangular Grid option is selected. The Grid Angle setting
specifies the magnitude and direction of grid rotation.
11.1.2.1.2.7. Reduction
Reduction is available only when the Vertex, Face Center, or Free Edge options are selected.
The Reduction setting has the following options:
Option Description
Max Number Enables the option to specify the maximum number
of Points of points allowed to be plotted.
Reduction Enables the option to specify a reduction factor from the
Factor full number of points.
Max Points is available only if the Max Number of Points option is selected. The Max Points
setting specifies a value for the maximum number of points allowed. If the maximum number of vertices
is greater than that of the specified value, then the points taken will be randomly selected.
11.1.2.1.2.9. Factor
Factor is available only if the Reduction Factor option is selected. The Factor setting specifies a
value by which to decrease the total number of points in the Point Cloud object. The final number of
vectors is total/n, where total is the total number of seeds, and n is the reduction value entered into
the box.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.1.2.1.2.10. Seed
Seed is available only if the Random option is selected. The Seed setting generates a different set of
random points for each value entered. The distribution cannot be replicated or reproduced for negative
seed values. For negative seed values, the random series is based on the system time. Different compilers
may generate different distributions for the same positive seed value.
Note
Similar sampling options are also available directly on Vector and Streamline objects.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Line.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
11.1.3.1.2. Definition
11.1.3.1.2.1. Method
11.1.3.1.2.2. Point 1
11.1.3.1.2.3. Point 2
Selecting Cut will extend the line in both directions until it reaches the edge of the domain. Points on
this line exist where the line intersects with a mesh element face.
Tip
In cases with very thin elements near a boundary, a cut line normal to the boundary may
stop too early and not quite reach the boundary. To correct this, you can set the environment
variable CFX_CUT_LINE_TOLERANCE before starting CFD-Post. For example:
CFDPOST_CUT_LINE_TOLERANCE='1.0e-8 [m]'
The smaller the number, the more likely it is that the line will reach the boundary. However,
if it is too small, the line could end up with a number of coincident (repeated) points.
Selecting Sample creates a line existing between the two points entered. It is mesh-independent, and
the number of points along the line corresponds to the value you enter in the Samples box.
11.1.3.1.3.2. Samples
Samples is available only if the Sample option is selected. The Samples setting specifies a value for
the number of evenly-spaced sampling points along the line.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
11.1.4.1.2. Definition
11.1.4.1.2.1. Method
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Option Description
YZ Plane Defines a plane normal to the X axis.
ZX Plane Defines a plane normal to the Y axis.
XY Plane Defines a plane normal to the Z axis.
Point and Enables you to specify a point on the plane and a
Normal normal vector to the plane.
Three Enables you to define a plane by providing three points
Points that lie in the plane.
11.1.4.1.2.2. X
X is available only if the YZ Plane option is selected. The X setting specifies an offset value from the
X axis.
11.1.4.1.2.3. Y
Y is available only if the ZX Plane option is selected. The Y setting specifies an offset value from the
Y axis.
11.1.4.1.2.4. Z
Z is available only if the XY Plane option is selected. The Z setting specifies an offset value from the
Z axis.
11.1.4.1.2.5. Point
Point is available only if the Point and Normal option is selected. The Point setting specifies the
3D coordinates of the point that lies on the plane.
11.1.4.1.2.6. Normal
Normal is available only if the Point and Normal option is selected. The plane normal is calculated
as a vector from the origin to the specified coordinates.
These options are only available if the Three Points option is selected. The Point 1, Point 2, and
Point 3 settings specify three points that lie on the plane.
The normal vector to the plane is calculated using the right-hand rule. The first vector is from Point 1
to Point 2, and the second is from Point 1 to Point 3, as shown in the following diagram. For example,
the direction of this vector might be important if you are using the plane to define a Clip Plane.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Option Description
None Cuts through a complete cross-section of each domain
specified in the Domains list. A slice plane is bounded
only by the limits of the domain. The Plane Type must
be set to Slice for this option (default).
Circular Causes the boundary of the plane to be in the shape
of a circle. The circle is centered at the origin for the
YZ, ZX, and XY Planes. For the other two methods, the
circle is centered at the first point entered in the
Definition frame.
Rectangular Causes the boundary of the plane to be a rectangular
shape. The rectangle is centered at the origin for the
YZ, ZX, and XY Planes. For the other two methods, the
rectangle is centered at the first point entered in the
Definition frame.
11.1.4.1.3.2. Radius
Radius is available only if the Circular option is selected. The Radius setting specifies a radius for
the circular boundary. You can enter a value or select the Expression icon to the right of the Radius
setting to specify the radius as an expression.
These settings are available only if the Rectangular option is selected. Two of these options will be
displayed because a plane is a 2D object. These settings will specify a width and height for the rectan-
gular boundary. The size of the rectangle is determined with reference to the planes origin (that is, the
plane is resized around its center).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
This setting is available only if the Rectangular option is selected. Only one of these settings is dis-
played at once. This setting specifies an angle to rotate the plane counterclockwise about its normal
vector by the specified number of degrees.
Invert Plane Bound is available only if the Circular or the Rectangular option is selected. If this
check box is selected, the area defined by the rectangle or circle is used as a cut-out area from a slice
plane that is bounded only by the domains. The area inside the bounds of the rectangle or circle do
not form part of the plane, but everything on the slice plane outside of these bounds is included.
Select the Slice option to cut the plane so that it lies only inside the domain.
A slice plane differs from a sampling plane. A sampling plane is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points
that are independent of the mesh. When you create a slice plane, the sampling points are placed at
locations where the slice plane intersects an edge of the mesh, causing an uneven distribution of the
sampling points. The density of these sampling points in a slice plane is related to the length scale of
the mesh.
When you use the slice plane for Vector plots, the seeds are the points where the plane intersects a
point on the edge of three mesh elements. You can view the seeds by turning on the Show Mesh Lines
option on the Render tab for the plane.
Select the Sample option to specify the amount of seeds in the plane.
When creating a sampling plane, the Plane Bounds must be either Circular or Rectangular. For
the Circular option, the density of sampling points is determined by the radius of the plane specified
in the Plane Bounds tab and the number of radial and circumferential sampling points. For Rectan
gular bounds, you must specify the size of the bounds for your plane in each of the plane directions.
The density of sampling points depends on the size of the plane and the number of samples in each
of the two coordinate directions that describe the plane.
Certain types of plots will show small differences across GGI interfaces. This is to be expected when the
nodes of the computational grids on each side of a GGI connection do not match. For example, contour
lines or fringe lines may not match exactly across a GGI interface. This is a very minor effect and is not
an indicator of any problem.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Volume.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
Option Description
Tet Displays volume that is connected to a tetrahedral mesh.
Pyramid Displays volume that is connected to a pyramid-shaped
mesh.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Option Description
Wedge Displays volume that is connected to a wedge-shaped mesh.
Hex Displays volume that is connected to a hexagonal mesh.
11.1.5.1.3. Definition
11.1.5.1.3.1. Method
Option Description
Sphere Creates a sphere-shaped volume. Enables you to
specify a center point and radius for the sphere
volume.
From Sur Creates a volume on a surface. Enables you to select
face a surface from the Location setting. Some surface
types may not be available.
Isovolume Creates a volume at a specified variables value. Enables
you to specify a variable and one or two values
(depending on the Mode) to create one or two
isosurfaces that bound the isovolume.
Surrounding Creates a volume at a node. Enables you to specify a
Node node by number.
11.1.5.1.3.2. Point
Point is available only if the Sphere option is selected. The Point setting specifies a center point for
the sphere volume. The point can be anywhere in 3D space.
11.1.5.1.3.3. Radius
Radius is available only if the Sphere option is selected. The Sphere setting specifies a radius for the
sphere volume.
11.1.5.1.3.4. Location
Location is available only if the From Surface option is selected. The Location setting selects from
a list of valid locations for the volume to exist on.
11.1.5.1.3.5. Variable
Variable is available only if the Isovolume option is selected. The Variable setting selects a variable
to plot the volume on. A Value for the variable must be selected before the volume can be defined.
These options are available only if the Isovolume option is selected. For help on which field to select,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Option Description
Intersec Creates a volume at the specified radius for the
tion Sphere option. For the From Surface option, the
volume is created on the surface of the object.
Below Inter Creates a volume for all of the radii less than the
section specified radius for the Sphere option. For the From
Surface option, the volume is plotted for all values
less than the given value on the location object.
Above Inter Opposite to the Below Intersection option.
section
Option Description
At Value Creates a volume for all the mesh elements in the domain
equal to the entered value.
Below Value Creates a volume for all the mesh elements in the domain
above the entered value.
Above Value Creates a volume for all the mesh elements in the domain
less than the entered value.
Between Creates a volume for all the mesh elements in the domain
Value in between the two entered values.
The Value fields are available only if the Isovolume option is selected. The Value fields specify values
to compare to using the Mode options. For example, if Value is set to 2 and Mode is set to At Value,
the Volume will plot where the variable is equal to 2.
3. Set Variable to Minimum Face Angle, Mode to Below Value, and then click Apply. Few volumes appear.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
4. Now enable Inclusive and click Apply again. Many more volumes appear.
The differences you see are caused by how CFD-Post calculates values for a given point on a mesh
(Mode is set to At Value):
...and as compared to Mode being set to Below Value with Inclusive being selected:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Isosurface.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Note
When you are creating an isosurface using a variable that is fundamentally discontinuous
within a domain, some unexpected portions of the isosurface may appear near the discon-
tinuity. A common example is a variable Theta that is discontinuous at 0° in a full 360° domain.
In such a case, creating an isosurface for any value of Theta will result in two basic parts: the
expected part of the isosurface that was defined by the Theta value that was selected; a
spurious part that appears along the border between nodes with Theta values near 0° and
nodes with Theta values near 360°. The spurious part should be ignored.
Note
When you are creating an isosurface (or another object such as a contour plot or a chart),
and the range of the specified variable is discontinuous at any point in its domain, the res-
ulting range may be different from what you expect it to be. For example, consider a case
with a cylindrical domain in which you would expect the Theta value to have a minimum
value of 0° and a maximum value of 360°. In reality, the range will depend on the vertices
of the mesh and the Theta values of the vertices. For example, an extremely coarse mesh
with only 10 equidistant nodes on the circumference with Theta values of 0°, 36°, 72°, 108°,
144°, 180°, 216°, 252°, 288° 324°, and 0°, will result in a range of 0° to 324° for Theta. If the
nodes appear on Theta values of, for example, 10°, 46°, 82°, 118°, 154°, 190°, 226°, 298°, 334°,
and 10°, then the range for Theta will be from 10° to 334°. Therefore, the exact range of
Theta will be dependent on the mesh. Refining the mesh will cause the actual range to be
more similar to the expected range.
11.1.6.1.2. Definition
11.1.6.1.2.1. Variable
The Variable setting specifies the variable that you want to plot.
Tip
Click the Location Editor to open the Variable Selector dialog box, which displays the
complete list of available options.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For help on which field to select, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
11.1.6.1.2.3. Value
The Value setting specifies a numerical value or expression to plot for the given variable.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Iso Clip.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the tree view.
• Iso clip locators interpolate values using a method that is slightly less accurate than that used for slice planes
and isosurfaces. For details, see Interpolation in CFD-Post (p. 147).
• Setting Visible when [value] to both >= and <= produces only faces, no lines (due to restriction 3), yet
clipped lines may mix with mesh lines if the latter are shown.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
11.1.7.1.2. Location
Click the Location Editor icon to open the Location Editor dialog box, which displays the complete
list of available options. If you specify multiple locators, they must all have the same dimensionality (for
example, all must be planes, rather than a combination of lines and planes).
You create a new clip setting by clicking the New icon or by right-clicking in the Visibility para-
meters area and selecting New. These actions cause the Visibility Parameter Properties settings to
appear:
Variable
Sets the variable that controls where the iso clip regions are placed. Typically you would specify geometric
variables.
Boundary Data
Enables you to set the boundary data to use of hybrid or conservative variable values. For details, see Hybrid
and Conservative Variable Values.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Vortex Core Region.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
11.1.8.1.2.1. Method
The Method setting specifies sets of equations that detect vortices as spatial regions. Click the drop-
down arrow to choose a method:
Absolute Absolute value of the dot product of velocity vector and vorticity vector.
Helicity
Eigen Helicity Dot product of vorticity and the normal of swirling plane (that is, the plane spanned
by the real and imaginary parts of complex eigen-vectors of velocity gradient tensor).
Lambda The negative values of the second eigenvalue of the symmetry square of velocity
2-Criterion gradient tensor. Derived through the hessian of pressure.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Q-Criterion The second invariant of the velocity gradient tensor. For a region with positive values,
it could include regions with negative discriminants and exclude region with positive
discriminants.
Real Eigen Dot product of vorticity and swirling vector that is the real eigen-vector of velocity
Helicity gradient tensor.
Swirling The discriminant of velocity gradient tensor for complex eigenvalues. The positive
Discriminant values indicate existence of swirling local flow pattern.
Swirling The imaginary part of complex eigenvalues of velocity gradient tensor. It is positive if
Strength and only if the discriminant is positive and its value represents the strength of swirling
motion around local centers.
Vorticity Curl of velocity vector.
Note
There is no recommended vortex core method; the appropriate choice of vortex core is always
case-dependent.
A number of methods are based on eigen analysis in local velocity gradient tensor. The following are
the related notations and equations.
(11.1)
where
(11.3)
(11.4)
(11.5)
Now let
(11.6)
(11.7)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
CFD-Post Insert Menu
(11.8)
then the tensor has one real eigenvalue and a pair of conjugated complex eigenvalues
(11.9)
We denote
(11.10)
and
(11.11)
Then
(11.12)
(11.13)
(11.14)
The last one is called Swirling Strength, and represents the strength of the local swirling motion. In CFD-
Post, the magnitude of both Swirling Vector and Swirling Normal is the Swirling Strength. The direction
of the Swirling Vector is that of the real eigen-vector ( in Equation 11.19 (p. 170)) and the direction of
the Swirling Normal is that of defined in Equation 11.26 (p. 171).
(11.16)
(11.17)
(11.18)
We can calculate the real eigen-vector using one of the non-zero vectors:
(11.20)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
(11.21)
(11.22)
Therefore, if
(11.25)
then, and . That is, all rows of matrix A are normal to both and , therefore they
are all proportional to
(11.26)
The region with negative of is used in the method proposed by F. Hussain. By using the eigen-values
and eigen-vectors of velocity gradient tensor , we have
(11.27)
Now when we look into the eigenvalues and vectors of , the same should apply to .
Let
(11.29)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
CFD-Post Insert Menu
(11.30)
where
(11.31)
(11.32)
(11.33)
where
(11.37)
(11.38)
(11.39)
Because is in the range of , we have . Therefore, the second eigenvalue for a 3x3
symmetry tensor is .
(11.40)
(11.41)
(11.42)
Bibliography
[1] M. S. Chong, A. E. Perry, and B. J. Cantwell. Copyright © 1990. Phys. Fluid. A General Classification of
Three Dimensional Flow Fields. 765-777. A 2.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
[3] R. Haimes and D. Sujudi. Copyright © 1995. Dept. of Aeronautics and Astronautics, MIT, Cambridge,
MA. Identification of Swirling Flow in 3D Vector Fields. Tech. Report.
[4] J. C. R. Hunt, A. A. Wary, and P. Moin. Copyright © 1988. NASA Ames / Stanford University in Oroc.
1988 Summer Program of the Center for Turbulent Research. Eddies, Streams, and Convergence
Zones in Turbulent Flows. 193-207.
[5] J. Jeong and F. Hussain. Copyright © 1995. Journal of Fluid Mechanics. On the Identification of a
Vortex. 69-94. 285.
[6] M. Jiang, R. Machiraju, and D. Thompson. Copyright © 2002. Eurographics – IEEE VGTC Symposium
on Visualization. A Novel Approach to Vortex Core Region Detection.
[7] S. K. Robinson, S. J. Kline, and P. R. Spalart. Copyright © 1988. In Proc. Zoran P. Zaric Memorial Inter-
national Seminar on Near Wall Turbulence. Statistical Analysis of Near-wall Structures in Turbulent
Channel Flow.
[8] M. Roth and R. Peikert. Copyright © 1998. A Higher-order Method for Finding Vortex Core Lines.
[9] J. Sahner, T. Weinkauf, and H.-C. Hege. Copyright © 2005. Eurographics – IEEE VGTC Symposium on
Visualization. Galilean Invariant Extraction and Iconic Representation of Vortex Core Lines.
[10] S. Zhang and D. Choudhury. Copyright © 2006. Phys. Fluids 18. Eigen Helicity Density: A New Vortex
Identification Scheme and its Application in Accelerated Inhomogeneous Flows.
[11] J. Zhou, R. J. Adrian, and S. Balachander. Copyright © 1996. Phys. Fluids 8. Autogeneration of Near
Wall Vertical Structure in Channel Flow. 288-291.
[12] J. Zhou. Copyright © 1997. Ph.D. thesis, Department of Theoretical and Applied Mechanics, University
of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, Urbana, Illinois. Self-sustaining Formation of Packets of Hairpin
Vortices in a Turbulent Wall Layer.
[13] J. Zhou, R. J. Adrian, S. Balachander, and T. M. Kendall. Copyright © 1999. Journal of Fluid Mechanics.
Mechanisms for Generating Coherent Packets of Hairpin Vortices in Channel Flow. 353-396. 387.
11.1.8.1.2.2. Level
The Level setting controls the strength of the vortex core that is displayed. The Level setting is normal-
ized between Method types so that it is easy for you to compare the output of the different methods.
The Actual Value setting displays the isosurface value. This read-only value varies between methods.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Note
The ranges of vortex core variables are calculated by CFD-Post and will be local to the timestep
(that is, the range will not be calculated across all timesteps).
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Surface of Revolution.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
11.1.9.1.2. Definition
11.1.9.1.2.1. Method
Option Description
Cylinder Creates a cylinder using two axial and one radial coordinate
points.
Cone Creates a cone using two axial and radial coordinate points.
Disc Creates a disc using one axial and two radial coordinate
points.
Sphere Creates a cylinder using one axial and radial coordinate
points.
From Line Enables you to specify a line or polyline to revolve about
the axis (to be specified later).
These fields are not available for the From Line option. These fields specify axial and radial coordinates
to define the surface of revolution.
Only one set of coordinates are available for the Sphere option. The axial value offsets the sphere in
the direction of the rotational axis, and the radial value is used as the radius of the sphere.
11.1.9.1.2.3. Line
Line is available only if the From Line option is selected. The Line setting selects a valid line or
polyline to use for rotation around the axis.
Tip
Click the Location Editor icon to open the Location Selector dialog box, which displays
the complete list of available lines.
Note
• An input line passes through a region where multiple domains overlap. Domains may overlap in
a single case or between multiple cases if more than one case is loaded.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.1.9.1.2.4. # of Samples
# of Samples is not available if the From Line option is selected. The # of Samples setting sets the
amount of sample points in the direction of the rotational axis.
The Theta Samples setting specifies the amount of sample points evenly rotated around the rotational
axis. For example, increasing this setting would make a cylinder's curve around its origin more accurate
(more like a circle).
The Project to AR Plane check box is available only if the From Line option is selected. If Project
to AR Plane is selected (it is by default), then the Theta values will be projected to the plane of constant
Theta. This produces a more refined mesh.
Option Description
Principal Enables you to specify a principal axis to rotate around.
Axis
Rotation Enables you to specify a custom axis to rotate around using
Axis a line.
11.1.9.1.3.2. Axis
Axis is available only if the Principal Axis option is selected. The Axis setting enables you to select
from a list the X, Y, or Z axis to rotate around.
The From and To text boxes are available only if the Rotation Axis option is selected. These fields
create a line representing the axis about which the Solid of Revolution is created.
These settings specify a start and end offset along the axis of rotation.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
11.1.9.1.5.2. Start/End R
These settings specify a start and end offset for the radius.
The following image shows two partial cones with the same profile and theta limits. For the end profile
of one of the cones, the radial offset is positive and the axial offset is negative, causing the radius to
increase and the axial coordinate to decrease with increasing theta (as determined by the right hand
rule with reference to the axis shown). Two other surfaces of revolution were included in the figure to
help illustrate axial displacements.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Polyline.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Option Description
From File Enables you to specify a file that has the point data
contained within it.
11.1.10.1.2. File
File is available only if the From File option is selected. The File setting specifies the filename of a
file to insert. You can type in the filename or click Browse to open the Import dialog box and search
for the file. The only valid file types to import are *.txt and *.csv.
Tip
This method enables you to read polylines or lines from another case (if that case has the
required geometry). First export a polyline or a line from another case, make sure to select
Export Geometry Information, then use the From File method in the other case to import
the lines along with any local data. You can also create your own file containing your data,
such as experimental data, by using the same format. For a description of the polyline file
format, see POLYLINE Data Format (p. 103).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
11.1.10.1.3. Domains
Domains is available only if the Boundary Intersection option is selected. The Domains setting
selects a domain for the polyline to exist in. For details, see Domains (p. 149).
List setting specifies a boundary. Click the Location Editor icon to open the Location Selector
dialog box, which displays the complete list of available boundaries.
Note
When intersecting with a thin surface boundary, the resulting polyline will include both sides
of the boundary. To intersect only one side, pick the primitive region that defines one side
of the thin surface instead of the entire boundary.
Note
If a mesh region is selected for the Boundary List, the polyline may not be successfully
generated if the mesh region is not part of an external boundary.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
CFD-Post Insert Menu
• Offset from an existing surface. The offset can be uniform or described by a variable.
Note
User Surface locators interpolate values using a method that is slightly less accurate than
that used for slice planes and isosurfaces. For details, see Interpolation in CFD-Post (p. 147).
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > User Surface.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Option Description
From File Same as for the polyline object. For details, see
Polyline: Geometry: Method (p. 178).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Option Description
Boundary Same as for the polyline object. For details, see
Intersec Polyline: Geometry: Method (p. 178).
tion
From Con Same as for the polyline object. For details, see
tour Polyline: Geometry: Method (p. 178).
Transformed Create a user surface by transforming a preexisting
Surface surface. You may specify a rotation, translation, and
uniform scale for the user surface.
Offset From Create a user surface by offsetting it from a preexisting
Surface surface. You may specify different methods of offset
for the user surface.
ANSYS Similar to the From File option, except that this
option uses ANSYS files to load into the instance. You
may also specify an associated boundary for the file
to be loaded onto. For details, see Specify Associated
Boundary Check Box (p. 184).
From STL File Similar to the From File option, except that this
option uses .stl files to load into the instance. Only
ASCII .stl files are supported.
You can also load STL files from the File menu in
CFD-Post. For details, see Importing .stl Files (p. 97).
Note
When multiple cases are loaded, user surfaces defined using either the Transformed
Surface or Offset From Surface methods exhibit different behavior depending on
where the preexisting surface is:
• The preexisting surface exists within domains from only one case.
– Examples: a slice plane that intersects, or otherwise has been restricted to, the domains of only
one case; a boundary that exists (by name) in only one case.
– Result: The user surface exists in each loaded case, and has the same geometry for all cases.
– Examples: a slice plane that intersects the domains of multiple cases; a boundary that exists
(by name) in multiple cases, and is selected in the list of preexisting surfaces specified by
Surface Name.
– Result: The user surface corresponds to the preexisting surface. That is, for every part of the
preexisting surface that exists in each case, there is a corresponding part of the user surface
that exists in the same case.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.1.11.1.2. File
File is the same for the polyline object. For details, see Polyline: Geometry: File (p. 178).
Tip
This method enables you to read surfaces from another case. First export a surface (such as
a plane or a boundary) from another case and make sure to select Export Geometry Inform-
ation and Export Line and Face Data. Then use the From File method in the other case
to import the surface along with any local data. You can also create a file containing your
own data, such as experimental data, by using the same format. For a description of the
surface file format, see USER SURFACE Data Format (p. 104).
11.1.11.1.9. Type
Type is available only if the Offset From Surface option is selected. The Type setting has the
following options:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
Option Description
Normal Enables you to offset the User Surface normal to selected
surface.
Translation Enables you to offset the User Surface from the selected
al surface by moving the User Surface.
11.1.11.1.10. Mode
Mode is available only if the Offset From Surface option is selected. The Mode setting has the
following options:
Option Description
Uniform Enables you to specify a uniform offset.
Variable Enables you to select a variable to plot from the surface.
An example of a uniform normal offset of -0.1 [m] to the Default surface of the static mixer,
colored by Temperature, is shown in the diagram.
11.1.11.1.11. Distance
Distance is available only if the Uniform option is selected. The Distance setting specifies an offset
distance, whether it is translational or normal.
11.1.11.1.12. Variable
Variable is available only if the Variable option is selected. The Variable setting specifies a variable
to plot.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
CFD-Post Insert Menu
When the distance is described by a variable, you can also incorporate the variable into an expression.
For example, after you have chosen a variable you can click in the Distance box and amend it with
valid CFX Expression Language (CEL) (for example, 0.5 * Temperature).
11.1.11.1.13. Direction
Direction is available only if the Translational option is selected. The Direction setting selects a
direction to offset the User Surface. Increased values do not increase the translational offset, they merely
change the ratio that the offset X, Y, and Z directions are placed at. For example, [2,3,1] and [4,6,2]
would identically offset the User Surface.
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Location Submenu
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Surface Group.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
11.1.12.1.2. Locations
The Locations setting specifies a location or locations on which to plot the Surface Group. For details,
see Locations (p. 152).
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.
For details on working with turbo surfaces, see Turbo Surface (p. 300).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Note
• From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Turbo Line.
For details on working with turbo lines, see Turbo Line (p. 303).
When post-processing a GGI simulation, the velocity vectors can be plotted in the local frame of reference
for each domain (Velocity Field Selection) or in the absolute frame of reference for each
domain (Velocity in a Stationary Frame). These two choices produce the same plot in all
stationary frame domains, but plot either the rotating frame or absolute frame velocity vectors in domains
that are in the rotating frame of reference.
Note
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
3D Viewer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Vector Command
11.2.1.2. Definition
11.2.1.2.1. Locations
Locations is the same for the Point Cloud object. For details, see Locations (p. 152).
11.2.1.2.2. Sampling
Sampling and all of the settings that correspond to it are the same for the Point Cloud object. For details,
see Sampling (p. 152).
11.2.1.2.3. Variable
The Variable setting selects a variable from the list to plot at the selected location.
Tip
Click the Location Editor icon to open the Variable Selector dialog box, which displays
the complete list of available variables.
11.2.1.2.5. Projection
The Projection setting has the following options:
Option Description
None Original vectors are plotted without any projection.
Coord Frame Plots vector components aligned with a principal axis
or an axis of a custom coordinate frame.
Normal Plots vector components normal to the location.
Applicable only for surface locations.
Tangential Plots vector components tangential to the location.
Applicable only for surface locations.
When a rotation axis is defined (set in the Turbo tab, or by reading a turbo case), the Projection setting
has the following additional options:
Option Description
Axial Plots vector components along the rotation axis.
Available when a rotation axis is defined.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Option Description
Radial Plots vector components radially to the rotation axis.
Available when a rotation axis is defined.
Circumferen Plots vector components along the theta direction
tial about the rotation axis. Available when a rotation axis
is defined.
11.2.1.2.6. Direction
There are two drop-down list boxes for this setting. The first list represents the options for the range
of the vector. The second list box represents the available directions to plot the vector in.
Option Description
Line Arrow Displays the vector as a line arrow. This option takes
the least amount of memory and is suggested for large
vector field plots.
Arrow2D Displays a filled line arrow.
Arrow3D Displays a 3D filled line arrow.
Arrowhead Displays the tip of the Arrow2D option.
Arrowhead3D Displays a 3D version of the Arrowhead option.
Fish3D Displays a 3D fish.
Ball Displays a sphere at every vector point. This option
does not specify a direction, only a scalar value.
Crosshair Displays a 3D “+” sign. This option, through its natural
shape, displays the normal and the tangential vector
to the surface automatically. However, the crosshair
does not point to the actual direction (does not have
an arrow pointing the direction of the actual vector).
Octahedron Displays a filled Crosshair option.
Cube Displays a 3D box. One face of the cube lies tangent
to the surface and one of the corners points in the
direction of the vector.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contour Command
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
11.3.1.2. Locations
For details, see Locations (p. 152).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.3.1.3. Variable
For details, see Mode: Variable and Use Plot Variable (p. 20).
11.3.1.4. Range
For details, see Range (p. 20). In addition to the options specified in the link, there is the following
option. Value List is a comma-separated list that enables you to specify the actual values at which
contours should be plotted. For example, if plotting temperature in a combustor, you might try a value
list of 300, 500, 700, 900, and 1100K. It should be noted that entering a value list overrides the
number specified in the # of Contours (p. 191) field.
Note
When dealing with the face values of variables X, Y, and Z, CFD-Post computes the global
and local ranges using vertex values whereas Fluent computes the ranges using cell-center
values. As a result, the computed ranges may differ between CFD-Post and Fluent.
• Vertex
The variable data is interpolated from mesh vertex values. This is the default setting for all types of
results. Note that this option is always in effect for non-Fluent results.
The variable data is taken (without interpolation) from one of two sources, depending on availability:
– Wherever face-center values are available on a locator, those values are used for contour creation.
Face-center values are typically available on boundaries and interfaces for Fluent files.
– If face-center values are not available on a locator, then cell-center values of the mesh elements are used
for contour creation, provided that such cell-center values are available. For example, for locators that
“cut” through mesh elements (for example, planes and isosurfaces), the variable data is taken from the
(cell-center) values for the mesh elements that are “cut” by the locator.
• If neither face-center values nor cell-center values are available, CFD-Post issues a warning message and
does not generate a contour.
Note
• Contours created in CFD-Post with the Face option are similar to contours created in Fluent
with the Node values option switched off.
A notable difference between such contours in CFD-Post and Fluent is that Fluent
contours always use cell-center values even when face-center values are available. It
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contour Command
follows that such contours will be different between CFD-Post and Fluent for locators
that have face-center values, typically boundaries and interfaces. On such locators,
the contour minimum and maximum values in CFD-Post should match the minimum
and maximum face set values in Fluent.
• When dealing with the face values of variables X, Y, and Z, CFD-Post computes the global
and local ranges using vertex values whereas Fluent computes the ranges using cell-center
values. As a result, the computed ranges may differ between CFD-Post and Fluent.
• Hybrid
Hybrid variable values are used. Such values exist only in CFX results.
• Conservative
Conservative variable values are used. Such values exist only in CFX results.
Note
In the following cases, CFD-Post makes the Boundary Data setting available, even if not all
the domains in the Domains specification for the contour contain CFX results:
• In the current session of CFD-Post, the variable has been plotted using hybrid values in a domain
that is not selected in Domains.
In these cases, if you make a contour with the Hybrid option, undefined values are plotted
over domains that do not contain hybrid variables.
11.3.1.9. # of Contours
The # of Contours setting specifies the number of contours in the plot. This will not increase the range,
it will increase only the number of contours within the range.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Option Description
Default Displays the text as gray.
User Spe Enables you to specify a custom color.
cified
Tip
Click the Location Editor icon to open the Select color dialog box, which displays the
complete range of available colors.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Streamline Command
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
The assumption of steady-state flow is assumed when a streamline is created, even with a transient
simulation. Although the CFD-Post streamline algorithm is efficient, the calculation of large numbers
of streamlines in a large domain can still take a long period of time. Therefore, when calculating
streamlines for a solution for the first time, start by plotting a small number of streamlines and then
increase the number of streamlines until the best generation time vs. detail ratio is found.
Note
In multi-domain turbo cases, streamlines may not always cross from one domain to next.
This can happen when there is no overlap between the two domains, or when the domain
interface is not modeled as an interface, but rather as outlet/inlet pair (for example, in Fluent).
If you want to view streamlines in both domains in such cases, you can start the streamlines
from both "inlets", or from the inlet and the outlet, setting the Direction to be Forward and
Backward.
Note
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Option Description
3D Stream Plots the streamline inside a specified domain from a location.
line
Surface Plots the streamline on a surface from a location. A Surface Streamline is defined
Streamline as a line everywhere tangent to the surface variable component at a given instant
of time.
11.4.1.2. Definition
11.4.1.2.1. Domains
Domains is available only if the 3D Streamline option is selected. For details, see Domains (p. 149).
If you are starting your streamlines from an inlet, outlet, or slice plane, you are advised to use the Factor
field to reduce the number of streamlines. If your solution is likely to contain recirculation areas, or regions
of high vorticity, you are advised to reduce the Max Segments number to a few hundred streamlines.
If the streamlines stop part of the way through the domain, increase the Max Segments value until
you receive good results.
11.4.1.2.3. Surfaces
Surfaces is available only if the Surface Streamline option is selected. The Surfaces setting selects
a location or locations to plot on. For details, see Locations (p. 152).
11.4.1.2.5. Locations
Locations is available only if the Locations option is selected. For details, see Locations (p. 152).
11.4.1.2.6. Sampling
Sampling is available only if the 3D Streamline option is selected. The Sampling setting is
identical to the Sampling setting for a Point Cloud object, except that you cannot select the Random
option for this setting. For details, see Sampling (p. 152).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Streamline Command
11.4.1.2.8. Variable
Use Variable to select a variable to plot. Using the Velocity variable is recommended. For details,
see Variable (p. 187).
11.4.1.2.10. Direction
The Direction setting has the following options:
Option Description
Forward Specifies that the streamline goes only in the positive direction from the start
point.
Backward Specifies that the streamline goes only in the negative direction from the start
point.
Forward and Specifies that the streamline goes in both the positive and negative directions
Backward from the start point.
Domain Interfaces are required to connect multiple unmatched meshes within a domain (for example,
when there is a hexahedral mesh volume and a tetrahedral mesh volume within a single domain)
and to connect separate domains.
This occurs when you have a stationary and a rotating domain or domains rotating at different rates.
This occurs when you are reducing the size of the computational domain by assuming periodicity in
the simulation.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
CFD-Post Insert Menu
the streamline is almost linear. This will have negative effects if you plot a variable on the streamline
because the linearly interpolated line will omit the points in between the points that create the line.
be an expression. To create an expression, click the Expression icon and enter the expression.
be an expression. To create an expression, click the Expression icon and enter the expression.
11.4.3.1.3. Interval
The Interval setting specifies the time interval at which you want to plot the symbols.
11.4.3.1.4. Symbol
The same options are available for the Symbol setting for the vector object. For details, see Sym-
bol (p. 188). The symbols are drawn along the vector for the streamline at the given point.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Streamline Command
Option Description
Line Plots the streamline as a line.
Tube Plots the streamline in tube shape.
Ribbon Plots the streamline in a flat tube shape. Ribbons also displays axial rotation
of the fluid as it passes through the domain.
11.4.3.2.3. # of Sides
# of Sides is available only if the Tube option is selected. The # of Sides setting specifies the number
of sides to the tube. The minimum number of sides is 3 and the maximum is 20.
11.4.4.1.1. Mode
The Mode setting has the following options:
Option Description
Grid Relat Specifies that the streamline must lie within the specified fraction of the local
ive grid cell size. Selecting Grid Relative means that the Tolerance is directly
proportional to the mesh spacing. In areas where the mesh has been refined
(such as areas where the flow pattern changes quickly), the Tolerance setting
reduces the distance between streamline points proportionately. This in turn
produces more accurate streamlines in these areas.
Absolute Specifies that the calculation points for streamline elements must lie within
the Tolerance distance specified.
11.4.4.1.2. Tolerance
The Tolerance setting specifies the accuracy of the path. As the Tolerance setting becomes finer, the
accuracy increases but the calculation time increases.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
• Particle tracking can trace the mean flow behavior in and around complex geometries.
• The injection of several particles from a point can help to display the turbulence properties of the flow.
In ANSYS Fluent, particle tracking information is contained in a Fluent Particle Track XML file. For details
on creating a particle track file in ANSYS Fluent, see Exporting Steady-State Particle History Data in the
Fluent User's Guide. To learn how to import such a file into a case loaded in CFD-Post, see Import Fluent
Particle Track File (p. 97). Once the Fluent Particle Track file has been loaded, a Reread button appears
in the Particle Track details view. Clicking that button causes the particle track file to be reread and
automatically updates any object that has a dependency on that file.
In ANSYS CFX, particle tracking information is written to the results file. The parameters are set in the
pre-processor. CFD-Post also provides support for track files created in CFX by enabling the import of
particle tracking data from a separate file. If a CFX results file contains particle tracking data, an object
will exist in the tree view of type Res Particle Track.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Particle Track Command
Note
• To insert a Fluent particle track, select File > Import > Import Fluent Particle Track File.
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Option Description
From Res Creates the particle track from the current .res file. This option is available only with a valid
results file.
CFX-4 Creates the particle track data from the selected file.
Tracks From
File Note
You cannot load Fluent Particle Track Files using this option; such files can be
loaded only via File > Import > Import Fluent Particle Track File.
11.5.1.1.1. Domains
Domains is available only if the From Res option is selected. For details, see Domains (p. 149).
11.5.1.1.2. Material
Material is available only if the From Res option is selected. The Material setting selects a material
to emulate with the particle track.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.5.1.2. File
File is available only for ANSYS CFX cases. The File setting specifies the filename of a file to load. You
may type in the filename or click Browse to open the Select CFX-4 Particle Track File dialog box,
and search for the file.
11.5.1.3. Injections
For ANSYS Fluent cases, the Injections setting enables you to filter by injection region.
Option Description
Maximum Enables you to set the maximum number of tracks to be
Number of plotted.
Tracks
Reduction Enables you to specify a reduction factor to decrease the
Factor number of tracks to be plotted.
11.5.1.4.1. Reduction
Reduction is available only if the Reduction Factor option is selected. This setting is the same as
Factor for the Point Cloud object. For details, see Factor (p. 153).
Option Description
Up to Cur Plots the track values up to the current timestep only.
rent
Timestep
Since Last Plots the track values from the previous timestep to the
Timestep current timestep.
User Spe Enables you to specify a beginning and ending
cified. time/distance.
Note
For transient cases, CFD-Post uses transient timesteps (as shown in the timestep selector) to
determine Since Last Timestep values; CFD-Post does not limit timesteps by solver
timesteps, or by what is written in the particle tracking XML file as separate times. Therefore,
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Particle Track Command
if Since Last Timestep is selected, the tracks will be limited to the values between
the previous timestep (from that selected in the Timestep Selector) and the currently selected
timestep. If this is a steady-state case, this option will not limit the tracks in any way.
• -5 specifies tracks 1 to 5
You may view the Info tab to view the Total Tracks and Tracks Shown. For details, see Particle Track:
Info (p. 203).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
CFD-Post Insert Menu
• When Size Option is Constant, the symbol size is constant for all particles. The particle size displayed is a
mean particle diameter size multiplied by the value you set with the Scale setting.
• When Size Option is Particle Diameter, the Scale Type can be Absolute or Relative.
– When Scale Type is Absolute, the particle size displayed is a mean particle diameter size multiplied by
the value you set with the Scale setting.
– When Scale Type is Relative, symbol sizes are scaled by the domain.
Note
Enabling symbols for single-point tracks will cause CFD-Post to show symbols for each point
that exists between the Min. Time and Max. Time. The interval setting has no effect because
there is no interval to show. This behavior is different than for tracks that have segments,
because tracks without segments are not visible unless a symbol is drawn on them.
For particle tracks that have no lines for the given set of tracks, CFD-Post evaluates each
point for the tracks against the Min. Time and Max. Time and, if the time on that vertex
falls between those times, a symbol is drawn. Therefore, track symbols will exist on track
vertices that have differing times (that is, it will not just be a symbol at 1.0 s for all tracks;
rather, it will be a symbol for all track points with a time between 0.5 s and 1.0 s).
Option Description
User Spe Enables you to enter a custom value for the maximum time
cified value. This is the default for steady-state simulations.
Current Uses the current timestep as the maximum time value. This
Time is the default for transient simulations.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Volume Rendering Command
are similar to the Show Numbers check box for the contour object. For details, see Show Numbers
Check Box (p. 192).
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note that CFD-Post shows the tracks displayed after reduction and filtering. Track Limiting is just a
way to show parts of a track that are displayed (after reduction and filtering); if a track happens not to
be visible during the Track Limiting range, then nothing will be shown for that track, but the number
of tracks and the track index range is always reported for all tracks.
Tip
If you want to see the track numbers for that particle tracks that are visible within the limits,
you can turn on Show Track Numbers in the Symbol tab.
If you have changed settings on another tab menu, you must click Apply before the information is
updated.
Tip
A gradient background in the viewer can interfere with the interpretation of volume rendering
results. You may find it useful to set the viewer background to solid white so that the
gradients of the solution itself are easier to see. You can set the viewer background with the
Tools > Options > CFD-Post > Viewer > Background: Color Type option.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Domains
Where the Volume Rendering will be calculated.
Variable
The name of the variable to be used in determining the transparency of the object.
Range
Range enables you to plot using the global, local, or a user specified range of a variable. The range affects
the variation of transparency used when plotting the object in the viewer.
• The Global range option uses the variable values from the results in all domains (regardless of the
domains selected on the Geometry tab) and all time steps (when applicable) to determine the transparent
and opaque values.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Volume Rendering Command
• The Local range option uses only the variable values on the current object at the current time step to
set the transparent and opaque range values. This option is useful to use the full transparency range on
an object.
• The User Specified range option enables you to specify your own transparent and opaque values.
You can use this to concentrate the full transparency range into a specific variable range.
Boundary Data
You can specify the use of Hybrid or Conservative values. For help on the use of Hybrid or Conservative
values, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values in the CFX Reference Guide.
Transparency Scale
Sets calculation of the object transparency with either a Linear or Logarithmic scale. By default, the scale
is Linear.
Transparency Map
The name of the color map to use when rendering the transparency of the object.
Note
You can create your own transparency map by clicking the map editor icon . It is
possible to invert the transparency gradient (making larger data values more transparent),
but using an inverted transparency gradient with a user-specified range of values may
cause “holes” to appear in the plot.
Resolution
The number of plane cuts per axis. The larger the number of plane cuts, the finer the resolution in the
volume rendering.
Transparency Factor
The factor applied to the overall transparency of the plot. Values can range from 0 (fully opaque) to 1 (fully
transparent).
Important
Volume rendering data displays properly for translational and reflective instances, but not
for rotational instances.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For details on changing the view settings, see View Tab (p. 26).
Note
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
11.7.1.2.1. Type
The Type setting has the following options:
Option Description
Expression Adds an expression, selected from a list, to the text string.
Timestep Adds the current timestep to the text string.
Time Value Adds the current time value to the text string.
Filename Adds the filename or the entire pathname to the text string.
File Date Adds the date that the file was created to the text string.
File Time Adds the time that the file was created to the text string.
Crank Angle Adds the crank angle associated with the current timestep.
This is only applicable to internal combustion engine cases.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Text Command
11.7.1.2.2. Expression
Expression is available only if the Expression option is selected. The Expression setting specifies
an expression to enter into the text string.
11.7.1.2.4. Format (for the File Date and File Time options)
Format is available if either the File Date or File Time options are selected. The Format setting
selects a time format to enter into the text string.
• If you select Determine the number formatting automatically, CFD-Post will change the formatting to
the one that best suits the data being plotted.
• If you clear Determine the number formatting automatically, you can choose between scientific notation
and fixed notation, and set the amount of precision.
Option Description
Two Coords Specifies the text to sit in the Viewer in the 2D plane.
Three Co Specifies the text to be fixed to one point in the Viewer
ords and rotate with that point when the view is rotated.
11.7.2.1.2. X Justification
This setting is available only if the Two Coords option is selected and is the same for the Legend
object. For details, see X Justification (p. 212).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.7.2.1.3. Y Justification
This setting is available only if the Two Coords option is selected and is the same for the Legend
object. For details, see Y Justification (p. 212).
11.7.2.1.6. Rotation
The Rotation setting specifies a rotation for the text about the bottom-left corner of text in a counter-
clockwise direction. When the X/Y Justification is set to Center, the object rotates about the center
point of the text.
11.7.3.3. Font
The Font setting specifies a font type for the text from a list.
Note
– Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in
the tree view.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Coordinate Frame Command
• You cannot use a user-defined coordinate frame as part of a general CEL expression. For example,
radius = sqrt(x_myAxis^2 + y_myAxis^2), is not valid.
For information on how to define a coordinate frame, see Coordinate Frame Details (p. 209).
11.8.1.2. Origin
The Origin setting specifies 3D coordinates corresponding to the location of the new Coordinate Frame.
The first point is the origin for the new coordinate frame (labelled Origin in the Definition tab). The
second point is used to create a Z axis in the new frame. A vector is calculated from the Origin to the
point defined in the Z Axis Point box and used as the third axis of the new coordinate frame. The plane
normal to the Z axis is now set and contains both the X and Y axes.
A third point entered into the X-Z Plane Pt box is needed to define the location of the X and Y axis in
the plane normal to the Z axis. The X-Z Plane Pt point, along with the two points already specified,
define a plane that lies in the X-Z plane (see diagram below). Because the X axis must now lie in both
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
CFD-Post Insert Menu
the X-Z plane and the plane normal to the Z axis, its location must be the line of intersection between
the two planes. The positive direction for the X axis is the same side as the X-Z Plane Pt point lies with
respect to the Z axis.
Finally, because the Y axis must be perpendicular to both the X Axis and the Z Axis, its positive direction
is determined by the right-hand rule.
If X-Z Plane Pt is specified such that it lies on Axis 3, an error is displayed. The projection of the X-
Z Plane Pt onto the plane normal to the Z axis would be on the origin and does not give enough in-
formation to define the X axis.
Note
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Legend Command
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Only the default legend for the selected view/figure is shown in the tree view. The other default legends
continue to exist, even when not displayed in the tree view.
Option Description
No Title Omits the title.
Variable Sets the title to the name of the variable mapped by
the legend.
Variable Variable and Location is the same as Vari
and Loca able except that the name of the locator is appended
tion to the title.
User Spe Enables you to specify a custom title.
cified
11.9.3.3. Title
The Title field is available only after the User Specified option has been selected. This setting
enters a custom title.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Note
The legend will always display Temperature in absolute units: if C or K are selected as tem-
perature units, the legend's data will be displayed in K; if F or R are selected, the legend's
data will be displayed in R. For details, see Function Calculator (p. 263).
11.9.3.6. Location
11.9.3.6.1. X Justification
The X Justification setting has the following options:
Option Description
None Enables you to specify a custom X location using the
Position fields.
Left Places the legend on the left side of the viewer.
Center Places the legend in the center of the viewer.
Right Places the legend on the right side of the viewer.
11.9.3.6.2. Y Justification
The Y Justification setting has the following options:
Option Description
None Enables you to specify a custom Y location using the
Position fields.
Top Places the legend at the top of the viewer.
Center Places the legend in the center of the viewer.
Bottom Places the legend at the bottom of the viewer.
11.9.3.6.3. Position
The Position fields specify a custom point at which to position the legend. This setting is available after
the None option is selected for the X and/or Y Justification settings. The values entered are fractions
of the screen width/height for x and y respectively. For example, 0.2 for the X value would place the
legend 1/5 across the screen from the left. A value of 0.2 for the Y direction would place the legend
1/5 up from the bottom of the Viewer. The placement uses the bottom left corner of the legend as a
reference.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Legend Command
11.9.4.1.2. Aspect
The Aspect setting specifies the width of the color range bar.
11.9.4.2.3. Font
The Font setting specifies a font for the interval labels.
11.9.4.2.5. Color
The Color setting specifies a color for the title and interval labels. You can click the color bar to browse
through predefined colors, or click the Color Selector icon and select a color from the Select color
dialog box.
Note
When using a legend as the basis for quantitative analysis, you should ensure that lighting
is turned off for any objects colored by a variable. This will give you exact matches between
object colors and legend colors.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
CFD-Post Insert Menu
To apply an Instance Transform to an object, select the Apply Instancing Transform check box on the
View tab for the object and select the transform from a list.
Note
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view or in the 3D Viewer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Instance Transform Command
If the Instance Transform object is using more than one of the following check boxes, (Apply Rotation,
Apply Translation, and Apply Reflection/Mirroring) the order in which each segments are applied
are rotation, translation, then reflection.
11.10.2.3.1. Method
The Method setting has the following options:
Option Description
Principal Rotates about a principal axis.
Axis
Rotation Rotates about a user-specified axis.
Axis
11.10.2.3.2. Axis
Axis is available only if the Principal Axis option is selected. The Axis setting specifies a principal
axis to rotate about.
Option Description
Instances Splits 360 degrees into the amount of passages entered
in 360 and places a copy at each passage, if possible.
Value Evenly distributes copies from zero to the specified angle.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.10.2.3.8. Angle
Angle is available only if the Value option is selected. The Angle setting specifies the rotational angle.
11.10.2.4.1. Translation
The Translation setting specifies a 3D translation.
Tip
A quick way to define a reflection for your case is to right-click the Wireframe near the
reflection plane and select Reflect/Mirror.
11.10.2.5.1. Method
The Method setting has the following options:
Option Description
YZ Plane Specifies a reflection about the YZ plane.
ZX Plane Specifies a reflection about the ZX plane.
XY Plane Specifies a reflection about the XY plane.
From Plane Specifies a reflection about a user-specified plane.
11.10.2.5.2. X/Y/Z
These settings are available only if one of the principal plane options are selected. These settings specify
the distance along the normal axis to the plane to reflect by.
11.10.2.5.3. Plane
Plane is available only if the From Plane option is selected. The Plane setting specifies a plane from
the list.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Instance Transform Command
The axis of rotation is defined using the Rotation Axis feature on the Rotation section of the Instance
Transform tab. An axis parallel to the z-axis was set. Rotation only was applied initially. An angle of
180 degrees was implemented.
The next step involves creating an XY plane (called Plane 1) at X= -1 and Z=1. For details, see Plane
Command (p. 156). After clicking to expand the Reflection/Mirroring submenu, reflection is applied on
Plane 1.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
CFD-Post Insert Menu
A clip plane will act on all objects in the Viewer, including the Wireframe, but will not affect other
functions such as calculations (that is, a calculation will still use the entire location, whether visible or
not).
Note
• Depending on the context, you may be able to perform an insert from the shortcut menu in the
tree view.
Important
When a clip plane is coincident with regions, boundaries, or interfaces that are planes, the
results of a Save Picture command may not match what you see in the 3D Viewer (depending
on the orientation of the case). In this situation, set the Use Screen Capture check box.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Color Map Command
Note
To enable/disable Clip Planes, you must use a Viewer shortcut menu command. For details,
see CFD-Post 3D Viewer Shortcut Menus (p. 78).
Note
The Transparency editor is similar to the Color Map editor, except that it controls the density
of a color, rather than the color itself. It is currently used only in conjunction with Volume
Rendering objects.
You can apply a color to the opaque color point to better visualize the transparency gradient
in the Preview area of the Transparency editor, but the color will not be used in the Viewer.
To access the Transparency editor, click the icon on the Volume Rendering editor.
In gradient mode, all Color Map controls other than divisions are enabled; in zebra mode, Insert,
Delete, and Distribute are all disabled and the Position indicator is read-only (and reflects the
setting in the divisions indicator).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Preview
The Preview both shows the results of your edits and enables you to modify your color points. One color
point will always be longer than the others; this indicates the color point that you can drag with the mouse
or modify with the controls in the Color Point Properties area: the Color definition bar, the Transparency
slider, and (in gradient mode) the Position indicator.
You can navigate from one color point to the next by:
• Clicking Insert to add a color point mid way between the current color point and its neighbor.
• Clicking on the Preview bar to insert the color point and, if necessary, adjusting its location by typing
a value in the Position field.
Color
The Color control enables you to change the color of the active color point. When you click the color field,
it cycles through ten preset colors. To define any color, click the Color selector icon to the right of the
Color option and select one of the available colors.
Transparency
The Transparency slider enables you to control how opaque each color is.
If you select Make available in other cases, the color map will be stored in your preferences file
when you click Apply.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Table Command
If you select Set as default, when you click Apply the color map will be stored in your preferences
file and will be the default color map for all future objects in all future files. For this reason Make
available in other cases will also be selected automatically.
Note
The default CFD-Post color map is not the same as the default Fluent color map. To use
the default Fluent color map for a particular locator (such as a contour):
1. Select File > Load Results and double-click the desired file.
a. On the General tab for the locator, set Color Map to Fluent Rainbow.
Each of these methods inserts a new variable and opens the Variables workspace. For details, see
Variables Workspace (p. 49).
Each of these methods inserts a new expression and opens the Expression workspace. For details, see
Expressions Workspace (p. 54).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Each of these methods inserts a new table under the Report object. To see the table in the report,
you must generate the report. For details, see Report (p. 33).
To learn how to work with tables, see Editing in the Table Viewer (p. 222).
Note
When multiple cases are loaded, the Default Case field enables you to specify which case
the table values apply to. If the cases are in case-comparison mode, you have the option of
creating a table that uses values from the differences in values between cases 1 and 2.
Changing the Default Case field removes all unsaved values and definitions from the table.
To enter data into a cell, select a cell and type in the information you want. To edit the current contents
of a cell in the cell itself (rather than in the cell definition field), double-click the cell.
The cell contents can be formatted with bold, italic, and underline fonts; left, center, and right justification;
word wrapping; font sizes; and text and background colors. Multiple cells can be merged into a single
larger cell to enable large items (for example, titles) to span multiple cells. For details, see Table 11.2: Table
Viewer Tools Toolbar (p. 224).
To perform a formatting operation on multiple cells, click in the upper-left cell of the group and, while
pressing Shift, click in the lower-right cell of the group. While the group is highlighted, toolbar operations
are applied to all cells in the group.
Numeric data, (that is, numbers alone, numbers with units, and expression results), can be formatted
to display in scientific or fixed notation with a specified number of significant digits.
Table contents can be cut (Ctrl+C) and pasted (Ctrl+V) into Microsoft Excel documents and vice versa.
For faster expression entry, there is also a Shortcut Menus toolbar above the table with the following
items. Type = into the cell and click the given menu to display a variety of items that can be inserted
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Table Command
automatically at the current cursor location. All, except Annotation, are also available in details view
for expressions.
• CFD-Post
• CEL
• Time Step
• Time Value
– Name
– Path
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.15.1.2. Expressions
Tables in CFD-Post have the ability to evaluate and display expression results and update those results
when variables and/or locations they depend on change.
To enter an expression, edit a cell and prefix a valid CFD-Post expression with an equals sign (=). For
example, you may enter the following into a cell:
=2*areaAve(Pressure)@inlet
When the focus leaves the cell, the table displays the evaluated result of that equation in the cell. When
selecting a cell containing an expression, the expression is displayed in the cell editor box immediately
above the table. You can edit the expression in the cell editor box. Alternatively, you can double-click
the cell and edit the equation from the cell itself. For details on how to enter common expressions and
functions quickly, see Shortcut Menu (p. 222).
If there is an error in evaluating the expression contained in a table cell, the cell will be colored red.
Units for expression evaluations that return a temperature will always be displayed in K or R. For details,
see Function Calculator.
The toolbar above the Table Viewer contains the following icons:
Icon Description
Creates a new table.
• CFD-Post State Files (*.cst) - Loads the table CCL from the given state
file. If the file contains tables with names that already exist, numbers will
be added to the end of the names of the imported tables to differentiate
them from existing tables.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Table Command
Icon Description
• Comma Separated Values Files (*.csv) - Loads the values in the CSV file
into a new table. You can specify the table name in the Load Table dialog
box.
• CFD-Post State (*.cst) - Saves the current table to a state file. Tables
saved in state files will maintain expressions and formatting and, when
reloaded, will exactly reproduce the original table.
• HTML (*.htm, *.html) - Saves the current table to an HTML file. Note
that the saved HTML table will contain expression results, and not the
expressions. All formatting will be converted to the HTML equivalent.
Word-wrapping is always on. The Save Table dialog box contains
additional formatting options including table title, caption, borders,
margins, spacing, and gridline visibility.
• Text (*.txt) - Behaves identically to the CSV option, except that you
can specify the separator.
Launches the Cell Formatting dialog box, where you can specify
scientific or fixed notation, the precision, and whether to show the
value or the units (at least one of the value or units must appear).
Changes the size of the font used in the cell.
Opens the Select color dialog box for setting the background color.
Opens the Select color dialog box for setting the text color.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Icon Description
Causes a cell to span rows or columns (Merge Cells) or reverses that
operation (Unmerge Cells).
1. Cells A1-D1: Applied bold font, background color, and text centering. Manually resized cell widths individu-
ally.
2. Cell A1: Applied text wrapping and resized cell height manually.
Note
To perform a formatting operation on multiple cells, click in the upper-left cell of the group
and, while pressing Shift, click in the lower-right cell of the group. While the group is high-
lighted, toolbar operations are applied to all cells in the group.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
Note
When using the Turbo workspace to post-process a turbo-machinery case, several "Turbo
Charts" are created by default. For details, refer to Turbo Charts (p. 308).
3. Click OK.
The chart object appears under the Report heading in the tree view. A Details view appears for
the new chart object and the Chart Viewer takes focus.
5. Click Apply to see the results of your changes displayed in the Chart Viewer.
6. Optionally, on the Data Series tab click the Get Information on the Item icon to view summary data
for the current series.
7. Optionally, click Export to save the chart data in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file. You can load the
values in the CSV file into external programs such as Microsoft Excel.
To see the chart in the report, you must generate the report as described in Report (p. 33).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
CFD-Post Insert Menu
11.16.1.1.1. Type
The Type setting has the following options:
Option Description
XY Plots X axis variable vs. the Y axis variable. XY charts use
polyline or line locators to plot values that vary in space.
Transient Plots an Expression (typically time) on the X axis and
or Sequence enables you to specify a variable to plot on the Y axis.
Transient or Sequence charts use expressions or a point
locator to plot the variation of a scalar value vs. time or
multi-configuration runs.
Histogram Plots the number of values or the proportion of values that
fall into each specified category.
Subtract mean
Causes the mean to be subtracted from each value to better show the amplitude of the noise.
Note
for the Min and Max values, click Get range from FFT output .
Reference Values
Click Reference Values to display the Reference Values dialog box. There you can set the following values
(which will apply to all Fast Fourier Transform charts): Reference Acoustic Pressure, Length, Velocity,
and whether to Save as default.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
When interpreting time-sequence data from a transient solution, it is often useful to look at the data's
frequency attributes. For instance, you may want to determine the major vortex-shedding frequency
from the time-history of the drag force on a body recorded during a simulation, or you may want to
compute the frequency distribution of static pressure data recorded at a particular location on a body
surface. Similarly, you may need to compute the frequency distribution of turbulent kinetic energy using
data for fluctuating velocity components.
To interpret some of these time-dependent data, you need to perform Fourier transform analysis. The
Fourier transform enables you to take any time-dependent data and resolve it into an equivalent sum-
mation of sinusoids.
The CFD-Post FFT module assumes that the input data have been sampled at equal intervals and are
consecutive (in the order of increasing time).
The lowest non-zero frequency that the FFT module can pick up, , is given by , where
is the total number of samples, and is the sampling interval (or timestep size). If the sampled sequence
contains frequencies lower than this, these frequencies will be aliased into higher frequencies.
The highest frequency that the FFT module can pick up, , is given by . Note that
the floor function has been applied to to round it down to the nearest integer. Note that, when
is even, .
The value at zero frequency represents the mean value. The mean value can be taken out of the plot
by selecting Subtract mean check box.
The discrete FFT algorithm is based on the assumption that the time-sequence data passed to the FFT
corresponds to a single period of a periodically repeating signal. Because in most situations the first
and the last data points will not coincide, the repeating signal implied in the assumption can have a
large discontinuity. The large discontinuity produces high-frequency components in the resulting
Fourier modes, causing an aliasing error. You can condition the input signal before the transform by
"windowing" it, in order to avoid this problem.
Suppose there are consecutive discrete (time-sequence) data that are sampled with a constant interval
:
(11.43)
(11.44)
Hamming's window:
(11.45)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Hanning's window:
(11.46)
Barlett's window:
(11.47)
Blackman's window:
(11.48)
These window functions preserve 3/4 of the original data, affecting only 1/4 of the data the ends.
The Fourier transform utility enables you to compute the Fourier transform of a signal, , a real-
valued function, from a finite number of its sampled points.
For a periodic set of sampled points, , the discrete Fourier transform expresses the signal as a finite
trigonometric series:
(11.49)
(11.50)
The previous two equations form a Fourier transform pair that enables you to determine one from the
other.
Note that when you vary from 0 to in Equation 11.49 (p. 230) or Equation 11.50 (p. 230), the fol-
lowing is true:
• When is even, the range of index corresponds to positive frequencies, and the range of
index corresponds to negative frequencies. The frequency at , called the Nyquist fre-
quency, is a unique value.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
• When is odd, the range of index corresponds to positive frequencies, and the range of
index corresponds to negative frequencies. In this case, the Nyquist frequency does not
exist.
For the actual calculation of the transforms, the CFD-Post adopts the Fast Fourier transform (FFT) al-
gorithm, which significantly reduces operation counts in comparison to the direct transform. Specifically,
CFD-Post uses the FFT algorithm from the Intel Math Kernel Library. This FFT algorithm allows for the
processing of an N-point FFT where N can be even or odd.
The Name list is where you add and delete data series on the chart. You can also click Statistics to
display a dialog box that shows statistics about the data set. You perform all of these tasks by clicking
the icons beside the list area (New, Delete, Statistics). All the icons become enabled after you create an
initial series; in addition, all functions are available when you right-click a data series name.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
CFD-Post Insert Menu
• For a General > XY chart or a General > Histogram chart, choose a Location or File or Monitor Data to
define the source of the data for the series you are creating. A typical location would be a line or a streamline;
a typical data file would be a CSV file.
• For a General > XY - Transient or Sequence chart, a typical Location would be a point. However, such a
chart will also accept a File or Expression or Monitor Data as the data source. For example, you could use
an expression to plot areaAve(Temperature)@Outlet as a function of time.
Files that use commas as delimiters have at least one section of numerical data. If there is only one
section of data, then the name specification (consisting of the [Name] header and the line that follows
it) and the [Data] header are optional, but not independently; they must either be both included or
both omitted. If there is more than one section of data, the name specification and [Data] header
are both required. The line that follows the [Data] header is always optional; omitting it causes default
variable names and default units to be assumed. An example section follows:
[Name]
Velocity Profile
1
There are two exceptions to this: if the extension of the file is .xy, then the delimiter is a tab character; If the extension of the file
is .out, then the delimiter is a space character.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
[Data]
Z [ m ],Velocity [ m s^-1 ]
-0.10000000,4.53693390
-0.09797980,4.54303789
-0.09595960,4.54667473
-0.09393939,4.54347515
-0.09191919,4.54762697
...
The line following the keyword [Data] may specify the variable names and units for each column of
numerical data that follows. If variable names are not provided, default names are applied.
This is the same format as the export file in CFD-Post. It is also the same format that CFX-Solver Manager
uses when exporting lines from a chart. Data exported from these sources can be imported directly into
CFD-Post to produce a chart line.
Note
When exporting histogram data, the Y Axis data (that is, the counts) will be stored in the
CSV file with the variable name "Count(Histogram Data)". The "(Histogram Data)" suffix is
required if this information is imported into CFD-Post because it indicates to CFD-Post that
this variable must be interpreted as histogram data and not as regular chart line data.
Note
If File is selected as the data source for a Transient or Sequence chart, and a Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT) is being calculated, then the data in the file must be in particular units:
• If the FFT X Function setting has a value of Strouhal Number, Octave Band Full or One
Third Full, the X Axis data in the file must have units of [s] (seconds).
• If the FFT Y Function setting has a value of Sound Amplitude, Sound Pressure Level,
A Weighted, B Weighted or C Weighted, then the Y Axis data in the file must have units
of [Pa] (Pascals).
Section Name is used to select a section of data from the file. This setting does not appear if there is
only one section of data in the data source file.
X Axis Variable and Y Axis Variable specify which two columns of data are to be used to generate a
chart line.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
CFD-Post Insert Menu
When selected, the Custom Data Selection controls enable you to override the settings on the X Axis
and Y Axis tabs for each series individually. See Chart Details: X Axis Tab (p. 234) and Chart Details: Y
Axis Tab (p. 237) for more details on what each setting means.
You can also specify the use of Hybrid or Conservative values or to use the absolute value of data
points. For help on the use of Hybrid or Conservative values, see Hybrid and Conservative Variable
Values.
Other available settings depend on the chart type; see X Axis Data Selection (p. 234) for details.
• Current Cases
Monitor data from all cases are included in the series, as separate lines. For example, if results files
StaticMixer_001.res and StaticMixerRef_001.res are loaded and the residual monitor
MAX P-Mass is selected for the series, then multiple lines will be generated, one for each results
file.
• File
Monitor data is taken from the file you specify. The allowed file types are .res, .mres, .bak, and
.mon.
X Axis Variable and Y Axis Variable specify which variables are to be used to generate a chart line.
Take absolute value of data points controls whether the values of data points are always positive.
Note
If a complete multi-configuration (.mres) run is loaded as a single case, only the monitor
data that is present in the last configuration will be added to the series.
When General > Type is XY or Histogram, the Variable field can be set to any variable. Hybrid vs.
Conservative sets how conservation equations for the boundary control volumes are solved. See Hybrid
and Conservative Variable Values for details. Take absolute value of data points controls whether the
values of data points are always positive.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
When General > Type is XY — Transient or Sequence, the Expression field can be set to ex-
pressions provided in CFD-Post or to expressions that you have defined. For example, you could use
this option to plot areaAve(Temperature)@Outlet as a function of time.
When General > Type is XY — Transient or Sequence and Fast Fourier Transform is selected,
you can define an X Function.
The options for the X Function are related to the discrete frequencies at which the Fourier coefficients
are computed. You can apply the following specific analytic functions. Because the corresponding
definitions for the y-axis functions include contributions from both elements of a complex conjugate
pair (i.e. and ), definitions are provided for when is even, and when
is odd.
(11.51)
Strouhal Number is the nondimensionalized version of the frequency defined in the equation for
Frequency:
(11.52)
where and are the reference length and velocity scales. Note that you can set and
by clicking Reference Values on the General tab.
(11.53)
and/or
(11.54)
which represents the nth or kth term in the Fourier transform of the signal.
Octave Band Full is a range of discrete frequency bands for different octaves within the threshold of
hearing. The range of each octave band is double to that of the previous band (see Table 11.3: Octave
Band Frequencies and Weightings (p. 236)).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
CFD-Post Insert Menu
One Third Full is a range of discrete frequency bands within the threshold of hearing. Here the range
of each band is one-third of an octave, meaning that there are three times as many bands for the same
frequency range.
If Category Divisions are set to Automatic, you are able to specify the Number of Divisions. If Category
Divisions are set to User Defined, you are able to specify the Division Values.
The Division Values field enables you to type points where you want to create histogram boundaries.
You can either enter user-defined category divisions by typing a comma-separated ordered list directly
into the Division Values field, or click More to open up an editor for the division values (which
includes the ability to set the values in a particular unit). If you use the editor, then the values do not
need to be entered in order as you will be offered the chance to sort the values when you close the
editor.
for the Min and Max values, click Get range from existing chart .
The default X-axis scale is linear but can be set to be a Logarithmic scale. Select Invert Axis to reverse
the direction of the scale.
• If you select Determine the number formatting automatically, CFD-Post will change the formatting to
the one that best suits the data being plotted.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
• If you clear Determine the number formatting automatically, you can choose between scientific notation
and fixed notation, and set the amount of precision.
When the General tab is set to create a histogram, the Y axis Value can be:
• Count
When Count is selected, the display shows the number of values lying within each category,
or, if the Weighting is not set to None, the total weight within the category.
• Percentage
When Percentage is selected, the display is scaled to show the percentage of values or weights
lying within each category. The Percentage is calculated using all of the data on the selected
location, even if some of the data is not displayed because it lies outside of the selected category
boundaries. Hence the total Percentage shown in the selected categories may add up to less
than 100%.
• None
• Geometrical
• Mass Flow
The weighting setting changes the shape of the histogram by removing mesh dependencies. For example,
if mesh density varies along a line, counts are biased towards areas of higher density; the Geometrical
setting removes that bias.
When the General tab is set to Fast Fourier Transform, a Y Function field appears where you
can choose one of the following settings. The definitions are provided for when is even, and
when is odd. The definitions include contributions from both elements of a complex
conjugate pair: and .
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
CFD-Post Insert Menu
dB at 1 kHz) and is the most commonly used weighting function. See Figure 11.2: A-, B-, and C-weighting
Functions (p. 238) for a graphical representation. This option is available only when X Function on the X-
Axis tab is set to Octave Band Full or One Third Full.
(11.55)
where is the frequency step in the discrete spectrum, and is the Fourier mode power.
(11.56)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
(11.57)
For the octave analysis (that is, when the X Function option is set to either Octave Band Full
or One Third Full), the power spectral density has units of the signal magnitude squared (for
example, Pa2), and is defined for the frequency band as
(11.58)
Sound Amplitude
This is similar to the Sound Pressure Level (dB) option, and is a logarithmic conversion of the
pressure signal Magnitude into decibel units. The sound amplitude in dB, , is calculated for either a
Fourier mode or a frequency band using
(11.59)
(11.60)
where is the power spectral density for either a particular Fourier mode or a particular frequency
band (see Equation 11.55 (p. 238) and Equation 11.58 (p. 239)). is the reference acoustic pressure,
with a default value of Pa.
Magnitude
This is the amplitude. For the detailed spectral representation with all resolved harmonics (that is, when
the X Function option is set to either Frequency, Strouhal Number, or Fourier Mode), the mag-
nitude ( ) is defined for the frequency in one of two ways.
When is even:
(11.61)
When is odd:
(11.62)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
CFD-Post Insert Menu
For the octave analysis (that is, when the X Axis Function is either Octave Band or 1/3-Octave
Band), the magnitude is defined for the frequency band as
(11.63)
You can select the Use series name for legend name check box to derive the name of the line (as it
appears in the legend) from the name of the series (as defined on the Data Series tab and, if more
than one case is loaded, from the case name). Alternatively, you can clear that check box and type in
a new Legend Name.
You can have CFD-Post Automatically generate Line Color or you can:
2. Optionally click the bar beside Line Color to cycle through 10 basic colors. Click the right-mouse button
to cycle backwards. Alternatively, you can choose any color by clicking Color selector to the right of
the Line Color setting.
3. Optionally change the selection for Line Type or FFT Line Type. For details, see Line Type and FFT Line
Type Options (p. 240).
Use the Symbols drop-down menu to place a graphic at every data point of the series. Use the Symbol
Color control to set a color for the graphic the same way you did for the Line Color.
Note
Line width and symbol size can be set on the Chart Display tab for the chart as a whole,
but cannot be set for each line individually.
Both the FFT Line Type and Line Type settings have the following options:
• Lines (the default for non-FFT plots) - This line type is suitable for general plots.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
• Bars (the default for FFT plots) - This line type is suitable for FFT plots.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
CFD-Post Insert Menu
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
Note
Plotting fill areas for graphs that have multiple y values for a given x (such as streamlines)
does not produce useful results.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
CFD-Post Insert Menu
When Display Legend is selected, the chart's legend appears, either Outside Chart or Inside Chart.
When Outside Chart is selected, set the Location and Justification of the legend:
When Inside Chart is selected, the legend is displayed in a box that appears on the chart. Use the X
Justification and Y Justification controls to locate a fixed-size box at standard locations, optionally
using Width/Height to change the size of the box. Alternatively, set X Justification and Y Justification
to None so that you can use Position and Width/Height to control the size and position of the box
exactly.
Note
By default, the titles of the axes are derived from the variables used in the line definition
(not necessarily from the X Axis and Y Axis tabs because a transient chart that uses an ex-
pression and any chart that uses custom data selection will set the variables used directly).
You can override these default titles by going to the X Axis and Y Axis tabs, clearing the
Use data for axis labels check box, and typing in a Custom Label name.
The legend text is defined by default as a combination of the series definitions on the Series
tab and, when more than one case is loaded, the case names, but can be specified on a line-
by-line basis directly on the Line Display tab by clearing the Use series name for legend
name check box and typing in a Legend Name.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart Command
Time charts, which depict transient runs, have a Refresh button at the top of the page. When CFD-Post
determines that the chart requires updates, a note appears beside the Refresh button. Refreshes are
generally not automatic in order to ensure that you can make a series of changes without having to
wait through the update required by each change. However, time charts are updated automatically
when you print the chart, when a report is previewed, or when a report is generated (HTML/text).
Note
As time charts are compute-intensive, they are generated only after user action. And because
time chart data is not included in a state file, loading a state file will show an empty chart
until you click Apply in the chart details view or Refresh in the Chart Viewer.
1. Load the following results file, which is provided with a tutorial: StaticMixer_001.res.
2. Insert a plane (Insert > Location > Plane) and define its location using the point and normal method.
Define the point to be (0,0,0) and the normal to be (0,1,0) so that the plane is normal to the Y axis;
click Apply when you are done. For details, see Plane: Geometry (p. 156).
3. Insert a polyline (Insert > Location > Polyline) and define its location using the Boundary Intersec
tion method.
Set Boundary List to out and Intersect With to the plane you just created; click Apply when you
are done. For details, see Polyline: Geometry (p. 178).
5. In the Insert Chart dialog box, enter a name for the chart, and then click OK.
8. Set data source Location to the name of the polyline you just created.
The x-coordinate direction is parallel to the polyline in this example so the plot shows a variable
profile across the outlet.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
CFD-Post Insert Menu
1. Load the following results files, which are provided with a tutorial: elbow1.cdat and elbow3.cdat.
(Press the Ctrl key while selecting the two files, then click Open.)
Two viewports open, one with elbow1 and the other with elbow2 loaded.
2. Insert a line (Insert > Location > Line). Accept the default values for Geometry > Method, but set Line
Type to Cut. On the Color tab, set Mode to Variable and Variable to Temperature. Set the Range to
Local.
3. In the Outline view, double-click Case Comparison. The Case Comparison details view appears. Select
Case Comparison Active and click Apply.
A third viewport opens that displays the temperature difference between the two cases.
5. In the Insert Chart dialog box, enter a name for the chart, and then click OK.
8. Set data source Location to the name of the line you just created.
The x-coordinate direction is parallel to the polyline in this example so the plot shows a variable
profile across the outlet.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Figure Command
A chart showing Temperature versus X is displayed on the Chart Viewer tab. Three lines are there:
one for each of the sets of temperature values, and a third line that shows the difference between
those values.
Note
• You can change some of the properties of each line individually (including turning them on and
off ) by using the Line Display tab.
• The Difference line plots only the variable difference on the y-axis. For example, if you defined
a chart of Velocity (y-axis) against Pressure (x-axis), then the difference line will plot Velocity Dif-
ference against Pressure, not Velocity Difference against Pressure Difference.
1. From the toolbar, click the Comment icon or select Insert > Comment.
3. Click OK.
The comment object appears in the tree view, under the Report object.
A heading is entered into the Heading box. The Level setting controls the level of the heading
text in the report.
Paragraph text is entered into the large text box below the Heading box. Some Rich Text features
are supported using toolbar icons that appear at the top of the Comment Viewer tab. Pictures
can be inserted in the paragraph text area. External hyperlinks can be included in the paragraph
text, but will not work in the Report Viewer tab of CFD-Post. External hyperlinks will work when
the report is viewed in a web browser.
To see the comment in the report, you must generate the report. For details, see Report (p. 33).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
CFD-Post Insert Menu
To see the new figure, you must open the Report Viewer and refresh or publish the report. For details,
see Report (p. 33).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 12: CFD-Post Tools Menu
The Tools menu offers access to quantitative analysis utilities, the animation editor, and the timestep
selector. The Command Editor dialog box is also available so that you can enter CFX Command Language
(CCL) directly.
When reading transient cases, CFD-Post re-reads and re-imports the mesh, if the transient file contains
them. This feature enables CFD-Post to support transient rotor/stator problems, as well as moving-mesh
cases.
When CFD-Post reads a Transient Blade Row results file, the variables are reconstructed automatically
and the flow solution time is taken to the last time step. By default, the Simulation Timestep option
is used in the Timestep Selector, and includes the timesteps used in the CFX-Solver. It is possible to
recreate this timestep list by selecting a different Timestep Sampling option, and the solution will be
accordingly reconstructed for these new time location.
Note
All variables will always appear in the variables list for all transient files, even if the transient
file does not contain some of the variables. If you have the Load missing variables from
nearest FULL timestep option selected (Edit > Options > Files > Transient Cases), then
the missing variable data will be loaded from the nearest full timestep. Otherwise, the data
will be colored with the undefined color in these cases.
The following list describes the column headings in the list box. Some of these columns also appear in
the Case Comparison editor in CFD-Post.
• The Configuration column indicates the configuration name as set in CFX-Pre. This column appears when
you have a multi-configuration (.mres) file loaded.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
CFD-Post Tools Menu
• The # column displays the index number for the timestep. These values always begin at 1 and increase by
1.
• The Step column displays the timestep number, which is used for synchronization by time step. These values
always increase; because they are unique, they can be used in scripts.
For most cases, the values in the Step column are the same as those in the Solver Step column.
However, if you have a multi-configuration case or a case with run history, loaded using the Load
complete history as: A single case option (described in Load Results Command (p. 91)), then the
Step is calculated to give a unique, increasing value through all the configurations. It differs from
index because it can maintain a consistent value even though (for example) some transient files (.trn)
that were present when the run completed are no longer available. (For example, suppose that a
case has transient files at three timesteps and these appear in CFD-Post as steps 1, 2, and 3. If you
delete the middle transient file, CFD-Post will show entries in the timestep selector at steps 1 and 3,
but not 2. If a script was loading step 3, it will load the same results as previously.) Note, however,
that if an entire results file (.res) that is referenced by the multi-configuration results file (or the run
history) is no longer available, Step cannot maintain a consistent value for the remaining entries in
the timestep selector. For example, if you load just Step 10, you will not necessarily get the same
results loaded at the same timestep as you would have if you had loaded Step 10 before you deleted
the .res file.
• The Solver Step column displays the solver timestep or outer iteration number. In multi-configuration cases,
the solver step may not always increase across different cases and may not be unique.
Solver Step can be used in expressions. Timestep-related expressions such as Current Time Step and
Accumulated Time Step refer to the Solver Step.
• The Time [s] column shows the real time duration corresponding to the timestep. The units are always
seconds.
• The Type list displays the Partial or Full results file corresponding to that timestep.
• The Phase column appears for transient blade row cases. For details, see Using the Timestep Selector with
Transient Blade Row Cases (p. 251).
• The Crank Angle column appears for internal combustion engine simulations. It displays the crank angle
at each associated time step. The crank angle is calculated by multiplying the time by the rotation speed of
the crank.
The following icons/commands appear on the right side of the dialog box and/or the shortcut menu
accessible by right-clicking on a timestep in the list box.
Icon/Command Description
Switch To Selects the timestep. Same as double-clicking the timestep.
Opens the Add Timestep Files window, which enables you
Add timesteps to select one or more results files and load them into the
memory.
Only applies when there are added timesteps. This
Delete command enables you to delete added timesteps from the
timestep selector.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Timestep Selector
Icon/Command Description
Automatically animates the timesteps using Quick
Animate Animation mode. For details, see Animating
Timesteps (p. 255).
file. You can add to the set by clicking Add Timesteps and selecting a file of type res, bak, or trn,
or a directory containing files of type trn.
Select Ignore duplicate timesteps to avoid loading duplicate timesteps when loading a new file or
directory. If this option is not selected, duplicate timesteps will appear at the end of the list, and will
be given a unique timestep number.
Note
Adding timesteps to steady-state runs that contain particle tracks causes particles to be dis-
played up to the current time (which is zero for steady-state runs). To see the full particle
track:
2. On the Geometry tab, set Limits Option to User Specified and End Time to the maximum
time value for the simulation.
12.1.2. Using the Timestep Selector with Transient Blade Row Cases
The Timestep Selector shows discrete timesteps based on the Timestep Sampling option selected.
Unlike traditional transient simulations, these discrete timesteps do not represent transient files but
time locations where the compressed data is evaluated using Fourier Coefficients from the results file
(For more information, see CFX-Solver Output File (Transient Blade Row Runs) in the CFX-Solver Manager
User's Guide). These evaluated solutions do not attempt to reproduce the transient iterative process
towards a steady periodic behavior. However, they are evaluated from the start of the transient run to
facilitate comparisons to traditional transient calculations.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
CFD-Post Tools Menu
For transient blade row cases, the Timestep Selector has an extra column, Phase, and a new sampling
control (Timestep Sampling):
Uniform
You can specify the number of timesteps per phase period (# of Timesteps per Phase). The timestep
list shows the appropriate number of divisions for each phase period that is listed in the results file. Note
that you cannot control which phase periods are available.
Value List
You can create a custom timestep list based on a set of Phase Positions that you provide.
The listing of timesteps changes as the Timestep Sampling options are changed. When you click Apply,
these changes are set appropriately. The selected timestep will be automatically updated to the closest
phase position in the new timestep list.
Tip
For an overview of working with transient blade row cases, see Transient Blade Row Postpro-
cessing (p. 115).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Animation
• Off
The Off option causes each set of results to be independent in terms of the selected timestep.
• By Time Step
The By Time Step option causes each set of results to switch to “match” the timestep you select
for any set of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by timestep. The Match setting
controls the matching criterion. The Same Step option causes results with identical timesteps to
be synchronized, and results without identical timesteps to remain at their current timestep. The
Nearest Available option causes the closest timestep to be selected for each set of results if
there is not an exact match.
• By Time Value
The By Time Value option causes each set of results to switch to "match" the time value you select
for any set of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by time value. The Match setting
controls the matching criterion. The Same Value option causes results with identical time values
to be synchronized, and results without identical time values to remain at their current time value.
The Nearest Available option causes the closest time value to be selected for each set of results
if there is not an exact match. The remaining Match options enable different degrees of matching;
they are: Within 1%, Within 5%, and Within 10%.
• By Index
The By Index option causes each set of results to switch to "match", as closely as possible, the index
number you select for any set of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by index.
• By Crank Angle
The By Crank Angle option is only available when multiple internal combustion engine simulations
are loaded. It causes each set of results to switch to "match" the crank angle you select for any set
of results. All sets of results are therefore synchronized by crank angle. The Match setting controls
the matching criterion. The Same Value option causes results with identical crank angles to be
synchronized, and results without identical crank angles to remain at their current crank angle. The
Nearest Available option causes the closest crank angle to be selected for each set of results
if there is not an exact match. The remaining Match options enable different degrees of matching;
they are: Within 1%, Within 5%, and Within 10%.
Note
For Transient Blade Row cases, Timestep and Index are the same. Hence, timestep sync By
Time Step and By Index are identical options.
12.2. Animation
There are the following types of animation:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
CFD-Post Tools Menu
• Quick Animation (p. 254), which is a means to automatically sweep objects across their defined range.
• Timestep Animation (p. 256), in which the animation is created by stepping through available timesteps.
• Keyframe Animation (p. 257), in which you define the start and end points of each section of animation using
keyframes, then link these end points together by having CFD-Post create a number of intermediate frames.
Selecting Tools > Animation produces the Animation dialog box, where you can choose the type of
animation you want. The animation options are described in the following sections.
To activate the Quick Animator, right-click an object in the 3D Viewer and select Animate, or open
Tools > Animation and select Quick Animation.
Use the slider to select the number of frames per animation loop. The more frames you add, the more
positions the animating object will go through. The number of frames increases logarithmically as you
move the slider toward the Slow end.
You can animate as many objects, of any type, as you want. Just select the objects in the list and click
Play ; all selected objects will animate.
To stop an animation in progress, click Stop . The objects will return to the state they were in before
the animation began.
You can specify a number of repetitions (raise the Repeat forever button to enable the Repeat
field).
You can create an animation in any of a variety of formats by selecting the Save Movie option, specifying
the Format, and providing a filename. Select the Options button to select video creation and quality
options, just as for keyframe animations.
Note
The Windows Media Video (WMV), AVI, and MPEG4 format options all use MPEG-4 encoding,
so you will need a player that supports MPEG-4 to view animations in those formats.
If the Bounce option is selected (default), the plane will move to the positive limit, and then in reverse
to the negative limit, and then repeat, moving to the positive limit again. If the Loop option is selected,
the plane will move to the positive limit, and then jump to the negative limit (in one frame), and then
start moving to the positive limit again.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Animation
Depending on the shape of the domain relative to its bounding box and the plane orientation, the
animating plane may disappear for a number of frames at the ends of its ranges.
If the Bounce option is selected (default), the isosurface value is increased to its maximum value, and
then decreased to its minimum value, and repeated. If the Loop option is selected, the isosurface value
is increased to its maximum value, then set to its minimum value (in one frame), and then increased
to its maximum value again.
Note
Quick animation will not work if a Turbo Surface is defined using the Cone option.
By default, the symbol shape, interval, and size are overridden by the animation routines. If you want
to change these settings, click the Options… button. To use symbol settings from the original object,
clear the Override Symbol Settings check box.
The Spacing option specifies the interval at which to start a new batch of symbols. For example, with
a spacing of 0.6, the symbols animating on the object will move 60% of the way along the lines, at
which point another group of symbols will start at the beginning of the line. With a spacing of 1.0, all
symbols will travel to the end of their lines before a new group of symbols starts at the beginning.
Unlike other quick animations, Timestep animation does not automatically start when selected from
the Timestep Selector, you need to click Play. This gives you an opportunity to configure the animation,
which takes longer to load than other types of quick animations.
Note that the Bounce setting and the Frame Count (fast/slow) setting have no effect on Timestep an-
imations.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
CFD-Post Tools Menu
In addition to some of the standard buttons such as Play and Stop on the Animation Dialog Box (p. 258),
the Timestep Animation option also uses these buttons:
The Control By option determines which variable will be available to define the extents of the animation.
There are 3 options:
• Timestep: Uses timesteps to define the animation. You can use the Timestep Selector (p. 249) ( ) to select
specific timesteps.
• Time: Uses time to define the animation, and is only available for transient simulations.
• Crank Angle: Uses crank angle to define the animation, and is only available for IC Engine simulations.
Select Specify Range for Animation to specify the start and end points of the animation (based on
the variable chosen for Control By), otherwise CFD-Post will animate every timestep available.
You can expand the Advanced Frame Selection Controls panel if you want more control over which
timesteps will be used to create the animation. The options are dependent on the case:
• All Timesteps In Range: Uses every timestep available to create the animation between the
specified range (or every timestep in CFD-Post if no range has been specified).
• Specified Number of Frames: Enables you to specify the # of Frames and also their Spacing.
You can space the frames by Equal In Timestep, Equal In Time (for transient cases), or Equal
In Crank Angle (for IC Engine cases). When using this option, CFD-Post creates the animation using
the start and end points of animation (either user specified or, by default, every timestep) and divides
the animation according to the# of Frames. CFD-Post then creates the animation using the timesteps
that are nearest to the division points (be they based on timestep, time, or crank angle depending on
the Spacing option). The result may include duplicate timesteps if the specified frame interval is
smaller than the interval between the available timesteps. These will not be seen when viewing the
animation in CFD-Post but will exist in any generated video file.
• Specified Time Interval: Only available for transient simulations. Frames are included at the
specified Interval between the start and end points of the animation. Similar to the Specified
Number of Frames option, CFD-Post creates the animation using the timesteps nearest to the time
values generated using the specified interval. The result may include duplicate timesteps if the specified
frame interval is smaller than the interval between the available timesteps. These will not be seen when
viewing the animation in CFD-Post but will exist in any generated video file.
• Specified Crank Angle Interval: only available for IC Engine simulations. Uses the same
behavior as Specified Time Interval except that it uses the crank angle variable instead of
time variable.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Animation
• Specified Timestep Interval: Uses the same behavior as Specified Timestep Interval
except that it uses the timestep variable instead of the time variable.
You can specify a number of repetitions (raise the Repeat forever button to enable the Repeat
field).
You can create an animation in any of a variety of formats by selecting the Save Movie option, specifying
the Format, and providing a filename. Select the Options button to select video creation and quality
options, just as for keyframe animations.
Note
The Windows Media Video (WMV), AVI, and MPEG4 format options all use MPEG-4 encoding,
so you will need a player that supports MPEG-4 to view animations in those formats.
In CFD-Post, you can make animations based on keyframes. Keyframes define the start and end points
of each section of animation. Keyframes are linked together by drawing a number of intermediate
frames, the number of which is set by the # of Frames field in the Animation dialog box.
The basic approach to creating an animation sequence is to configure the problem in a particular state
and then save this state as a keyframe. Next, change one or more aspects of the problem state. For
example, change the viewer orientation by rotating the viewer object. You can then save this state as
a second keyframe.
Animations are created by linearly interpolating the change in state of the viewer position between
keyframe states. By default, 10 frames are created between keyframe states, but this is easily adjustable.
If the camera position changes between keyframes, the view is interpolated between the two positions
at each frame.
Every option and button that is accessible when Animation is active will increment by one linearly for
each of the frames between the two states. For example, if one keyframe has 10 contour levels, and
the next has 20 contour levels, then the number of contour levels will increment by one for each of
the ten frames between the two states. Objects that are binary in state are toggled at the end of the
keyframe sequence (for example, the visibility of an object). Animations can also be created using the
different timesteps in a transient run.
Note
If you have 2 keyframes with 10 frames between them, there are a total of 11 steps from
one keyframe to the next.
1. Once you have manipulated the user interface into a chosen start position, click New to set the current
state as Keyframe 1.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
CFD-Post Tools Menu
2. The keyframe becomes visible in the Keyframe Creation and Editing window.
3. Change the viewer and/or object parameters to obtain the second required state and click New to
create Keyframe 2.
4. When you click a keyframe to highlight it, the other options to the right of the keyframe list become active.
5. To display the highlighted keyframe in the viewer, click Edit Keyframe or double-click the keyframe
itself. To apply changes in the viewer to the highlighted keyframe, click Set Keyframe . If more than 2
keyframes exist and you want to change their order, you can move a Keyframe up and down by clicking
6. To set the number of intermediate interpolated frames, click a keyframe and set the value in the # of
Frames box.
After a second keyframe has been created, additional playback options are made available.
7. The looping option enables you to specify whether you want the animation to play in one direction during
each repeat or play forwards and backwards. For example, selecting Repeat of 3 on the Loop setting will
play the animation three times, jumping from the last Keyframe back to the first at the end of the first
two cycles. Selecting Bounce for the same number of repeats will cause the animation to play forwards,
and then backwards before playing forwards once more.
With the Repeat option, you specify how often the animation repeats before stopping. By default
the Repeat forever button is selected, so the animation will repeat continuously until you click
Stop .
8. The Animate Camera feature toggles whether the camera position is moved (interpolated) with the an-
imation.
If it is switched off, all objects, except for the camera positions, are animated.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Animation
The Approximate Animation Time is calculated with the following information: total number of frames
in the animation, the number of repetitions, the frame rate (regardless of whether you are saving to a
movie or not), and any animation speed adjustments.
Selecting an animation speed of Normal does not scale the animation by any factor.
Selecting an animation speed of Slower slows down the animation by adding sufficient additional
frames to achieve the specified factor. Selecting Generate more frames, spread evenly
automatically and transparently adds additional frames between keyframes. You will see the effect of
this the next time you play the animation. This results in higher quality animations, but will take longer
to compute because of the additional frames to interpolate. Selecting Duplicate frames when
saving movie duplicates existing frames when generating the final movie output. The effect of this
will be visible only when playing back the movie; you will see no effect when playing the animation in
CFD-Post. This option is faster, but the quality of the movie may suffer: it may look a little jerky.
Selecting an animation speed of Faster speeds up the animation by removing sufficient frames to
achieve the specified factor. Selecting Generate fewer frames, spread evenly automatically
and transparently removes some of the frames between keyframes. You will see the effect of this next
time you play the animation. The fewer frames between keyframes will be interpolated smoothly, as if
you had reduced the number of frames manually. Selecting Skip frames when saving movie
skips existing frames only when generating the final movie output. The effect of this will only be visible
when playing back the movie file; you will see no effect when playing the animation in CFD-Post. This
option is slower because all frames will be played in CFD-Post, but only some of the frames will be used
to generate the movie.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
CFD-Post Tools Menu
By default, all image files are created using an internal (software-based) rendering engine. In some
situations, it is desirable to create an exact copy of the screen image, as rendered by the graphics
hardware on the computer. This is possible by selecting the Use Screen Capture toggle. For very
complex images, this option can be significantly faster.
Enables you to select higher quality output for the generated images.
Enables you to specify the resolution of the resulting movie. By default, 640 x 480 is selected, but
you can select any of the values in the drop-down list, including NTSC or PAL standard resolutions, or
HD resolutions. You can also select Custom to specify the pixel resolution in the Width and Height
fields, or select Use Screen Size and specify a scale factor in the Scale (%) field.
12.2.4.1.3.6. Tolerance
Controls the amount of depth calculated for the creation of an image, where smaller values represent
more accurate images. The benefit of relatively high values is that less processing is required. However,
if the Tolerance value is too high (for instance, a value of 1), the back faces in an image may be displayed
on top of near faces.
If you have selected Save Movie (see Quick Animation (p. 254)), selecting Save Frames As Image Files
will prevent the deletion of the animation frame files from the temporary directory, where they are
stored by default.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Animation
Selecting this option enables you to specify where you want the animation files to be saved by entering
a path in the Directory field.
The rate (in frames per second) at which the movie will be generated. The movie viewer may also dictate
the playback rate.
12.2.4.1.4.4. Quality
With the Custom setting, you may specify the Variable Bit Rate by clearing the Variable Bit Rate
toggle and entering a bit rate. Reduce the Bit Rate value to lower the file size (and the file playback
quality).
A single cycle of an animation loop starts and ends at the same frame. If you repeat a loop, that frame
is encoded twice at the end of each cycle, leading to a brief pause at that point in the animation. Enable
this setting to smooth the playback of repeated loop animations.
2. Enter the name of the file; the extension is taken from the setting of the Format field.
Note
The Windows Media Video (WMV), AVI, and MPEG4 format options all use MPEG-4 en-
coding, so you will need a player that supports MPEG-4 to view animations in those
formats.
To open:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
CFD-Post Tools Menu
3. Click Open.
To save:
Note
The animation state includes all of the keyframe settings for Keyframe Animation. Keyframe
settings capture the complete state of CFD-Post as it was when the keyframe was created.
If an animation file containing keyframes is loaded into CFD-Post, then the whole of the
current state will be overwritten, including which cases are currently loaded and which
results files were used to load them.
If an animation file containing keyframes is loaded into CFD-Post, then the whole of the
current state will be overwritten, except that cases loaded automatically by ANSYS Work-
bench (for example, from a Solution cell) will be retained with their current results. Files
that are referred to in the keyframe state that have not been loaded automatically by
ANSYS Workbench (for example, files used for creating User Surfaces or Chart Series or
results files loaded manually) may not be referenced correctly by the keyframe state if the
project has been saved under another name or restored from an archive. Loading animation
files created under another project or outside of ANSYS Workbench is not supported.
To specify a value, you can enter a number in the value editor, move the slider, or click left/right mouse
buttons to increment/decrement the value by a portion of the range. All changes are applied immediately;
there is no need to click Apply.
12.4. Probe
Probe in CFD-Post enables you to determine exact variable values at specified points within a domain.
1. Select Tools > Probe or click Probe , or right-click an object in the viewer and select Probe Variable.
2. You can manually specify the probe coordinates in the Probe At fields or select a point in the viewer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Function Calculator
If Probe only this variable is not selected, the probe variable will be automatically chosen. (For
example, Temperature will be selected if you select a point on a plane that is colored by Tem
perature).
3. The probe variable can also be selected manually from the variable list.
4. If the desired variable does not appear in the list, select Other... and choose the variable from the Variable
Selector.
5. If Probe only this variable is selected, the probe variable will not change automatically when new co-
ordinates are entered.
The probed value appears in the box adjacent to the variable list and automatically updates every
time a new coordinate or probe variable is selected.
If you probe on a Point object, the probe position will use the position coordinates of the Point
object, not necessarily exactly where you chose.
Note
Probe locations will be selected more accurately when you zoom in tightly on the probe
location when picking in the viewer. The smaller the object in the viewer is, the less accurate
the picked location will be. A consequence is that you may get an undefined value on an
outer boundary because the point location will be slightly outside the domain. This problem
may disappear if you zoom in on the boundary and probe again. The Edit > Options > CFD-
Post > Interpolation Tolerance setting controls the distance by which a point can fall outside
a domain and still acquire data from that domain. For details, see Interpolation Toler-
ance (p. 137).
3. If multiple cases are open, choose which cases the Function Calculator should act upon.
For most functions, you can click in the Variable box and enter an expression. The expression can
include variables and any valid CEL (CFX Expression Language) function. For example, abs(Velo
city u) could be entered so that the calculation is performed using the absolute values of the
variable Velocity u. For details, see CEL Operators, Constants, and Expressions and CFX Expression
Language (CEL).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
CFD-Post Tools Menu
User variables are also available. For details, see Variables Workspace (p. 49).
For multiphase results, you can select which fluids to use in your calculation for selected functions.
The All Fluids option can be selected to perform the calculation using all of the fluids in the results.
Note
When calculating mass flow rate for a Fluent file, the option Mixture gives the same
results as All Fluids. These two options appear because have different origins (Fluent
and CFD-Post respectively); you may choose either for your calculations.
Click Calculate to calculate the result. Choose whether to base the calculation on hybrid or conservative
values. Most quantitative calculations are best performed using conservative variable values. For details,
see Hybrid and Conservative Variable Values.
Note
If the function result is a temperature, and if C or K are selected as temperature units, the
result’s units will be K. If F or R are selected, the temperature will be returned in R.
Important
There are some important limitations concerning calculations performed on CFX-4 results
files. For details, see CFX-4 Dump Files (p. 118).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Function Calculator
Note
Note
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
CFD-Post Tools Menu
Note
For details on each of the functions listed in the table above, see Quantitative Function List in the CFX
Reference Guide.
For example, there is a macro named Fan Noise that calculates the noise generated by a low-speed
fan. For this macro, you need to specify inputs such as the number of blades, the number of harmonics,
and the position of the observer.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
2. Select an appropriate macro from the drop-down list or open a CFD-Post session file that contains a user-
defined macro definition. (In the latter case, opening the file both loads the macro into the Macro Calcu-
lator and adds that macro to the drop-down list.)
These settings serve to provide input data to the macro. Which settings are required depends on
which macro is selected.
The macro might create objects, user variables, expressions, and other forms of output.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
CFD-Post Tools Menu
Some macros produce an HTML-formatted report that can be viewed by clicking the View Report
button or by opening the Report Viewer.
Some macros are predefined and are already in the list of available macros. Other macros (user-defined
macros) can be added to the list of available macros in any of the following ways:
• In the Macro Calculator, click Browse and select the macro file (a CFD-Post session file with extension
.cse). This will make the macro available for only the current session of CFD-Post.
• Add the pathname of your macro file (which has the file extension .cse) to environment variable CFX
POST_USER_MACROS, which is a comma-separated list of the pathnames of your macro files.
Some macros produce an HTML-formatted report that can be viewed by clicking the View Report
button or by opening the Report Viewer.
The Comfort Factors macro can be used to calculate values for Resultant Temperature and
Mean Radiant Temperature in HVAC simulations.
In order to use the macro, the velocity and temperature variables are required. In addition:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
• If Radiation Transfer is set to Surface to Surface then variable Wall Irradiation Flux is re-
quired.
• If Radiation Transfer is set to Participating Media then variable Radiation Intensity is required.
For CFX cases, the Radiation Transfer selection should match the radiation transfer mode used in the
CFX-Solver. For non-CFX cases, the selection should depend on which radiation variables are available.
Variables Resultant Temperature and Mean Radiant Temperature are created using the
values of expressions resultTemp and meanTemp, respectively. These expressions are visible on the
Expressions tab.
Note
As an alternative to calculating comfort factors in CFD-Post, the comfort factors may be cal-
culated during the solution process; this would be required, for example, when the model
simulates a ventilation system in which the control system depends dynamically on derived
comfort factors.
Note
For more information regarding variables Wall Irradiation Flux and Radiation
Intensity, which may be used by the macro, see Variables Relevant for Radiation Calcula-
tions in the CFX Reference Guide.
The Cp Polar macro produces a polar plot of the pressure coefficient (Cp) along a polyline. The macro
creates the polyline using the Boundary Intersection method. For details, see Polyline Command (p. 177).
The boundary and intersecting slice plane are defined in the Macro Calculator and passed to the sub-
routine as arguments. The boundaries selected for Boundary List in the Macro Calculator make up one
surface for the intersection. The second surface is a slice plane created using the X, Y, or Z normal axis
to the plane (Slice Normal) and a point on that axis (Slice Position).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
CFD-Post Tools Menu
The cp user variable is created by the macro from the cp expression. The cp expression can be defined
as:
(Pressure - $pref [Pa])/dynHead
where $pref is the Ref. Pressure set in the Macro Calculator and dynHead is a reference dynamic
head (evaluated at the inlet) that can be defined as:
0.5 * areaAve(Density)@inlet * areaAve(Velocity)@inlet^2
The Inlet Region selected in the Macro Calculator is used as the inlet location in the calculation of
dynHead.
Next, a Chart line of the cp variable versus the Plot X Axis value is created. The generated report contains
the chart and the settings from the Macro Calculator.
• Slice Normal: The axis that will be normal to the slice plane.
• Slice Position: The offset of the slice plane in the direction specified by the normal axis.
The Compressor Performance macro performs a series of calculations using the data set in the Macro
Calculator. The following information must be specified:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
• Rotor Blade(s): The locator used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
• Num. Main Blades: Some quantities calculated for a single blade set (main blade and any splitter blades) are
multiplied by the number of blade sets in the full 360° wheel in order to produce the total value for the
wheel.
• Fluid Gamma: The ratio of specific heat capacity at constant pressure to specific heat capacity at constant
volume (Cp / Cv).
• Rotor Blade(s): The locator used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
CFD-Post Tools Menu
• Num. Main Blades: Some quantities calculated for a single blade set (main blade and any splitter blades) are
multiplied by the number of blade sets in the full 360° wheel in order to produce the total value for the
wheel.
• Fluid Gamma: The ratio of specific heat capacity at constant pressure to specific heat capacity at constant
volume (Cp / Cv).
• Rotor Blade(s): The locator(s) used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
• Num. Main Blades: Some quantities calculated for a single blade set (main blade and any splitter blades) are
multiplied by the number of blade sets in the full 360° wheel in order to produce the total value for the
wheel.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
• Ref Height: Cross-section height (that is, the height of the outlet region, or the height of the blade at the
trailing edge).
• Rotor Blade(s): the locators used to calculate torque (one blade row) about the machine axis.
• Num. Main Blades: Some quantities calculated for a single blade set (main blade and any splitter blades) are
multiplied by the number of blade sets in the full 360° wheel in order to produce the total value for the
wheel.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
CFD-Post Tools Menu
• Ref Height: Cross-section height (that is, the height of the outlet region, or the height of the blade at the
trailing edge).
This macro calculates the noise levels of the turbomachinery as observed at a specific location. The
following information must be specified:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
• Blade Selection: Set to Automatic for a single blade passage or Custom for a multiple blade passage. If this
is set to Custom, you will need to specify the 2D region for the blade (Custom Blade) as well as the number
of blades (Custom # Blades).
• Observer (r) and Observer (theta): The distance and location of the observer, relative to the blade.
• Theta Sectors: The number of sampling points (sectors) equally spaced over 360° at a given radius around
the fan, used to calculate the noise values. A higher number leads to a more accurate solution, but takes
more time to calculate.
• Directivity Harm. #: The harmonic level at which the sound pressure levels will be calculated.
The loading coefficient parameter defines the decay (or decrease) of the sound-pressure level vs the
frequency. In general, the sound-pressure level decreases when the frequency increases. In his exper-
iments, Lowson replaced the unsteady loading by a steady one multiplied by a decay function. Based
on these experiments, this decay follows an exponential law with a negative slope. Lowson found
that a loading coefficient between 2 and 2.5 gives a sound-pressure level close to the experimental
data; that is, the loading coefficient defines the slope of the exponential law.
In general and for highly loaded blades, the decay of the sound-pressure level is very quick (one or
two peaks in the sound-pressure level spectrum) and therefore a higher value of the loading coefficient
will be appropriate.
• Acou. Ref. Pressure: Acoustic reference pressure ( ) is the international standard for the minimum audible
sound of 2.10-5 [Pa].
The acoustic reference pressure is used to convert the acoustic pressure into Sound Pressure in dB
using the following equation:
(12.1)
where is the acoustic reference pressure. The reference pressure depends on the fluid.
• Acou. Ref. Power: Acoustic reference power ( ) is used to convert the sound power from units of
to units of dB.
(12.2)
where:
(12.3)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
CFD-Post Tools Menu
For details on completing this dialog box, see Using the Fan Noise Macro (p. 276).
Several methods have been developed to predict tonal noise; the Lowson Model is described here.
In the low-speed regime, the main noise component is a dipolar source. Lowson [Lowson, M. V., 1970,
“Theoretical analysis of compressor noise”, The Journal of Acoustics So. Am., Vol. 47 (1), 1970, pp. 371-
385.] showed that the noise generated by a fan is directly related to the aerodynamic forces exerted
on the fixed and rotating blades. First, in a semi-empirical way, he calculated these forces; then he took
into account the distance between the source and the observer. In this case, the fan is considered as
a noise source for which the frequency depends on the rotational speed and other parameters. In 1962,
Lighthill established the acoustic pressure expression produced by a punctual force, , in rectilinear
motion.
(12.4)
where:
As shown in Figure 12.1: Relative position of the source and the observer (p. 277), and are the co-
ordinates of the Observer O (r, , ) and of the Source S (R, , t), respectively. is the convective
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
component of the rotational Mach number in the direction. and are respectively the thrust and
the drag (torque) forces exerted on the blade. According to Equation 12.4 (p. 276), when the force is
constant, the acoustic pressure is equal to zero.
Lowson extended Equation 12.4 (p. 276) to create a more general equation:
(12.5)
This relation describes the contribution of the convective phenomenon due to the term . Note
that Equation 12.5 (p. 277) must be evaluated at retarded time . This equation can be used to find an
expression for the sound from a point force in arbitrary harmonic motion.
The Lowson model enables the calculation, at the observer position, of the acoustic pressure generated
by steady and unsteady efforts. The latter are considered as punctual sources and correspond to the
loads exerting by the z blades of the rotor. Lowson integrated Equation 12.5 (p. 277) in time and space
to get the mth harmonic of the acoustic pressure generated by a periodic rotating loading:
(12.6)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
CFD-Post Tools Menu
(12.8)
as shown in Figure 12.1: Relative position of the source and the observer (p. 277) with being the axis
of rotation and the fluctuating loading and observer position being defined as:
In
(12.9)
• and are respectively the thrust and drag (torque) components of the aerodynamic unsteady force
represented by a global force exerted on the blade.
• The terms in and are important only in the acoustic near field. Thus, in the acoustic far field,
Equation 12.8 (p. 278) becomes:
(12.10)
Taking into account of the thrust and drag periodicities, Lowson proposed the following formulation:
(12.11)
Substituting the results obtained from Equation 12.9 (p. 278) and Equation 12.11 (p. 278) into Equa-
tion 12.10 (p. 278) gives:
(12.12)
The integrals in Equation 12.12 (p. 278) can be identified as Bessel functions, and, using the expressions:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
(12.13)
Equation 12.12 (p. 278) can be evaluated directly to give the sound level radiated from z rotor blades:
(12.14)
where:
The interest of this relation is the knowledge of the components of the fluctuating efforts and
.
Following the experimental work done on helicopter blades by Scheiman [Scheiman, J., 1964, “Sources
of noise in axial flow fans”, Journal of Sound and Vibration, Vol. 1, (3), 1964, pp. 302-322.], Lowson exten-
ded Equation 12.14 (p. 279) to an equation that relates the steady-state components of the force to the
acoustic pressure.
The Fan Noise macro calculates the tonal noise levels generated by a fan as heard at a specific location.
To access the Fan Noise macro:
4. In the Macro Calculator, specify the information described in Fan Noise Macro (p. 274).
5. When the Macro Calculator fields are filled in, click Calculate.
The Fan Noise macro outputs a report; to view it, click View Report. The report displays the input values,
the sound pressure levels, the sound power levels, the directivity of harmonic 1, and the overall results.
Here is a partial sample:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
CFD-Post Tools Menu
The turbo noise report will be created in your working directory as turboNoise_report.html along
with the tables (turboNoise_*.csv) and graphics (turboNoise_*.png) included in the report.
This enables you to reuse these elements in other documents, if required.
There are two ways to perform turbo noise calculations; you can have:
• A case with a single blade passage (the Lowson model is based on this)
As shown below, the only necessary differences in the two cases are the settings for Blade Selection
and the custom blade fields.
Fan Noise Macro Values Single Blade Passage Multiple Blade Passage
Domain Fan Block Fan Block
Blade Selection Automatic Custom
> Custom Blade Blade
> Custom # of Blades 9
# of Harmonics 6 6
Observer (r) 1m 1m
Observer (theta) 0 degree 0 degree
Theta Sectors 36 36
Directivity Harm. # 1 1
Loading Coeff. 2.2 2.2
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
Fan Noise Macro Values Single Blade Passage Multiple Blade Passage
Acou. Ref. Pressure 2e-005 Pa 2e-005 Pa
Acou. Ref. Power 1e-012 W m^-3 1e-012 W m^-3
Sound Speed 340 m/s 340 m/s
• Special commented lines that help define the graphical user interface for the macro
A macro must contain at least one subroutine written using Power Syntax.
Note that commas are used to separate arguments. Also note that strings are quoted.
You can embed graphical user interface controls into the macro by writing special comments between
the # Macro GUI begin and # Macro GUI end lines. An example macro follows:
# Macro GUI begin
#
# macro name = Area Average Macro
# macro subroutine = mySub
#
# macro parameter = Var
# type = variable
# multiselect = true
# default = Y
#
# macro parameter = Location
# type = location
# location category = surface
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
CFD-Post Tools Menu
#
# Macro GUI end
! no warnings 'redefine';
! sub mySub {
! ($variable, $plane) = @_;
# Create an expression for the area average of the variable value on the plane
LIBRARY:
CEL:
EXPRESSIONS:
! my $locationName = getObjectName($plane);
Average Value = areaAve($variable)@$locationName
END
END
END
!}
In the macro above, the special comments between the # Macro GUI begin and # Macro GUI
end lines specify:
• The input parameters and details of them, including their types and default values
When this macro is loaded, the entry Area Average Macro appears in the list of available macros
(under the Macro setting).
• Expression Average Value is updated (created if necessary). This expression evaluates to the area average
of the specified variable on the specified location.
• The specified values Var and Location, and the value of Average Value, are printed to the console
window (which is viewable when starting CFD-Post in Stand-alone mode).
In this example, the output filepath is specified using redirection of output from the Perl print com-
mand.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
In order to better learn how to create your own macro, you can view the existing macros in <CFDPOST-
ROOT>/etc/*.cse and study the definitions.
#type = <type> Specify this group of comments once for each input parameter
that is required by the macro.
#<option1> = <val>
The input parameters are displayed (in the order defined) in the
#<option2> = <val> graphical user interface, and, upon running the macro, are passed
(in the order defined) to the macro’s (main) subroutine as input
#.. arguments.
The following table provides details on the # macro parameter comment, including the options
available for each parameter type:
range 1, 100
float quantity type 0.1 [s] The quantity type controls which
units are allowed. A full list of
default 0.1 [s], 0.4 [s] quantity types can be found in <CF-
DPOSTROOT>/etc/<ver-
range Time sion>/common_units.cfx. To
specify that the float is
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
CFD-Post Tools Menu
• boundary
• chart
• chart series
• domain
• isosurface
• line
• plane
• point
• polyline
• streamline
• turbo line
• turbo surface
• user surface
• volume
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Macro Calculator
• geometry
• line
• plane
• point
• region2d
• selectable
• surface
• variable
• viewer-viewable
• volume
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
CFD-Post Tools Menu
The maximum face angle can be considered to be a measure of skewness. For details, see Mesh
Visualization Advice (p. 287).
(12.15)
is calculated for the two edges of the face that touch the node. The largest ratio is returned.
Connectivity Number
Connectivity number is the number of elements that touch a node.
Mesh Information
The Mesh Information option returns the number of nodes and elements in your volume mesh. It
also lists the number of elements of each element type. As an example, the mesh for the following output
contains two domains: one using hexahedral elements and the other containing tetrahedral elements.
The domains were connected using a domain interface:
Number of Nodes: 71680
Number of Elements: 139862
Tetrahedra: 75265
Wedges: 31395
Pyramids: 0
Hexahedra: 33202
1
If multiple cases are loaded, the results of each calculation are performed over all domains in the specified cases.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Calculator
When you click Calculate, the result window displays the results of the specified calculation. If the cal-
culated variable does not already exist, it will be created. This enables you to create plots of the calculated
variable.
Note
When you compare the mesh information for a Fluent file in Fluent and in CFD-Post, the re-
ported number of nodes (Fluent's "cells") will differ. In Fluent, each domain can have nodes
at its boundaries that are not acknowledged as being shared with other domains. This causes
Fluent mesh reports to contain duplicated nodes; however, the actual number of cells is the
same as reported by CFD-Post.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
CFD-Post Tools Menu
In many cases, the robustness of the CFX-Solver will not be adversely affected by high element volume
ratios. However, you should be aware that accuracy will decrease as the element volume ratio increases.
For optimal accuracy, you should try to keep the element volume ratio less than the value suggested
in the above table.
• You have loaded two or more cases using the Load Results File dialog box option Keep current cases
loaded
• You have loaded a single transient case (with results available for at least two time steps)
• You have loaded a multi-configuration case, or a case with run history, using the Load Results File dialog
box option Load complete history as (either as a single case or as separate cases), so that results for two
or more steps are available through the timestep selector.
• Difference variables are computed as the variable values from Case 1 minus the variable values from
Case 2. The latter are interpolated onto the mesh from Case 1 before the subtraction. As a result, the
difference variables are located on the mesh from Case 1.
To reverse the order of subtraction, swap the specifications for Case 1 and Case 2 in the Case
Comparison details view.
Note
→ Connectivity Number
→ Force
→ Length
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Case Comparison
→ Mass Flow
– When comparing variables on interior walls in cases where meshes are not identical, you
may see unexpected differences in difference plots. This can happen because during mesh
interpolation, variable values may get picked up from one or the other side of the interior
boundary. If the two sides do not have the same values, the interpolated values could
randomly oscillate between values of the two sides, producing additional difference in the
plot.
– When comparing cases with a large number of mesh nodes, CFD-Post may take a long
time to produce the difference variable and as a result may appear to be unresponsive.
• A Difference view is shown in a new view (in addition to the Case 1 (<case_name>) view and the
Case 2 (<case_name>) view). In that view, differences are shown on the mesh from Case 1.
• Each difference variable is named by appending “.Difference” to the end of the variable name from
which it was derived. For example, the difference variable for the variable Pressure is Pressure.Dif
ference.
• The difference variables can be used anywhere that variables can normally be used. The Function Calcu-
lator and Table Viewer have special support for the difference variables, enabling you to easily see
functions and tables (respectively) of difference values. In addition, a chart that is based on locators that
exist in both Case 1 and Case 2 will have a "Difference" chart line. See Example: Comparing Differences
Between Two Files (p. 246).
• CFD-Post refers to the cases as “Case 1” and “Case 2” rather than as the original case names (which are
usually based on the results filename).
Tip
When comparing two 2D cases, set the case that is extruded less as Case 1. This enables
CFD-Post to match nodes between the two cases for one of the symmetry boundaries
and to define difference plots.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
CFD-Post Tools Menu
Mesh Detection
Enables you to control whether or not CFD-Post needs to determine whether the meshes in the two cases
are identical. If you know beforehand that the meshes are the same or different, you can save processing
time by enabling the appropriate mesh detection setting. Your options are:
• Auto-detect same mesh causes CFD-Post to analyze the two meshes to determine whether they are
the same or different before performing any interpolation.
• Meshes are identical and Meshes are different enable CFD-Post to perform interpolation immediately,
which saves processing time when cases are large.
Note
When you know meshes to be topologically identical but the node numbering may
be different, use Meshes are identical. This setting causes CFD-Post to ignore node
numbering and just use the topology of the mesh. In such cases do not use the Auto-
detect same mesh setting because this fails when node numbering is not the same.
For example, when comparing a case from ANSYS CFX with a case from Fluent, the
node numbering may differ even between apparently identical meshes, so the Meshes
are identical setting is required.
Note
• If you run a case comparison on a file that contains solver-generated difference variables (such
as Volume Porosity.Difference), these variables will become unviewable when you
enter case comparison mode. However, the variables will be viewable again if you reload the
results file.
• Global ranges of difference variables are updated as domains are used. For example, if a multi-
domain case is loaded and a difference variable colors a locator that is in a single domain, the
range displayed will reflect the range of the difference variable only in that domain. If the locator
is moved to another domain (or a new locator colored by the same variable is added), the global
range for that difference variable is updated to reflect both domains.
function()@CASE:[1|2].location
• Case comparison is supported only for General mode. As a result, case comparison initiated from
the Turbo tab will revert to General mode.
• When using Variable Minimum or Variable Maximum option on a point in multi-file or compar-
ison mode, the point is placed at the location of the overall minimum/maximum. If you want to
place the point at the minimum/maximum value for the individual cases, select the appropriate
case in the point's Domain List selector.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Command Editor
In each case you can then view variables such as "<vector variable>.Difference" (such as Velocity.Differ-
ence) and "<scalar variable>.Difference" (such as Temperature.Difference). For a description of the
general variable syntax, see Quantitative CEL Functions in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.
Difference variables are computed on the mesh of the first case by first interpolating the variable from
the second mesh to the first mesh, and then subtracting the two variables.
(12.16)
This is not the difference of the vector magnitudes between file 1 and file 2.
If you plot a vector plot such as Velocity.Difference, it is obvious that a real vector is being plotted.
However, if you plot "<vector variable>.Difference" in plots that use a scalar variable, how the difference
variable is calculated is an issue. For example, suppose in one file you have a velocity vector (1, 0, 0),
so the velocity magnitude is 1 [m/s], and in the second file you have a velocity vector of (-1, 0, 0), so
the velocity magnitude is also 1 [m/s]. The vector variable Velocity.Difference variable is (2, 0, 0), and
the scalar variable that CFD-Post calls "Velocity.Difference" is equal to the magnitude of this vector
variable (that is, it is 2 [m/s]). You might expect Velocity.Difference to be equal to "velocity magnitude
in file 2" - "velocity magnitude in file 1", which would give a value of 0 [m/s], but this is incorrect.
1. Select Tools > Command Editor. Alternatively, right-click any object that can be modified using the
Command Editor and select Edit in Command Editor.
• If you select Tools > Command Editor, the Command Editor opens and displays the current state re-
gardless of any selection.
– If the Command Editor dialog box has not been used previously, it will be blank.
– If the Command Editor dialog box has been used previously, it will contain CCL commands. If you
do not want to edit the CCL that appears, click Clear to erase all content.
• If you right-click an object and select Edit in Command Editor, the CCL definition of the specific object
populates the Command Editor automatically. Modify or add parameters as required, then process
the new object definition to apply the changes.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
CFD-Post Tools Menu
3. Prepare the content of the Command Editor by adding new content, modifying the existing content, or
both.
The types of content that may be prepared are CCL, action commands, and power syntax. Combin-
ations of these types of content are allowed. For details, see:
Right-click in the Command Editor to access basic editing functions. These functions include Find,
which makes a search tool appear at the bottom of the Command Editor dialog box. Enter a search
term and click either Next or Previous to search upwards or downwards from the insertion point
or text selection. To hide the search tool, press Esc.
4. Click Process.
The contents are processed: CCL changes will affect CCL object definitions, actions will be carried
out, and power syntax will be run.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 13: Turbo Workspace
The Turbo workspace improves and speeds up postprocessing for turbomachinery simulations. To access
the Turbo workspace, click the Turbo tab. The two main parts of the Turbo workspace interface are
the Turbo tree view and the Turbo details view.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Turbo Workspace
13.5.Turbo Surface
13.6.Turbo Line
13.7.Turbo Plots
13.8.Turbo Macros
13.9. Calculate Velocity Components
Tip
Load file AxialIni_001.res (provided with a tutorial) into CFD-Post so that the descrip-
tions in this chapter are easier to follow.
When in the Turbo workspace, a wireframe representation of each component appears in the viewer.
The currently selected turbo component appears as a green wireframe. If it also happens to be initialized,
it will be accompanied by a visual depiction of the background mesh, shown as a transparent green
surface with white mesh lines.
The Turbo tree view also indicates which components are initialized and which are not; if the component
is uninitialized, the symbol next to a component name is grayed out.
After entering the Turbo workspace and initializing the turbo components, you are ready to start using
the turbo-specific features offered in the Turbo workspace.
Exactly one axis of rotation method must be specified. The axis definition can come from the results
file, or it can be specified manually as either a Rotation Axis (six Cartesian coordinates) or a Principal
Axis (X, Y, or Z). Upon changing the axis definition, the axial, radial, and Theta coordinates (and their
dependent objects and expressions) are automatically updated. For details, see Theta (p. 305).
1
Available components depend on the turbo setup in the preprocessor. There is a minimum of one component available for each
domain.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Initialization
Important
Transient Blade Row cases that use the Fourier Transformation method will have two domains
in CFD-Post, but only one domain will have data. Do not initialize Turbo Post for the non-
data domain because this will cause some Turbo-related features to fail.
• Input for calculating a background mesh. For details, see Purpose of Background Mesh (p. 297).
• Specification of the number of instances of each turbo component (such as stator, rotor, and so on) required
to represent the full geometry around the rotation axis.
Note
CFD-Post can initialize turbo space only for domains that are enclosed with inlet, outlet, hub,
and shroud regions. For more complex geometries, you must set up the problem to isolate
the region of interest into a separate domain that has these regions.
Correctly defined turbo spaces, as described in Requirements for Initialization (p. 295), can be automat-
ically initialized. To automatically initialize all components using the default (best guess) region assign-
ment, you can do one of the following:
• Choose to auto-initialize all components when a message prompts you upon entering the Turbo workspace
for the first time (after loading a case).
• Right-click a component in the Turbo tree view and select Initialize All.
• Use a CCL instruction; for details, see Initializing all Turbo Components.
Tip
For automatic 360° initialization, CFD-Post uses cut planes and then looks for intersections
between these and the turbo regions. However, if gaps within the slice (due to the blade
region) are large relative to complexity of the topology and curvature of the passage is high,
automatic 360° initialization might fail as CFD-Post cannot reconstruct the passage curves.
If your case has regions, you should be able to manually initialize by setting the turbo regions
from any one of the passages. See Individual Component Initialization (Advanced Fea-
ture) (p. 296) for details.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Turbo Workspace
The Uninitialize All Components button is accessible in the Turbo details view after double-clicking
Initialization in the Turbo workspace. A shortcut menu associated with a turbo component in the
Turbo tree view enables uninitialization for that component, or for all components.
Uninitializing all turbo components can be followed by initializing only the components that will be
studied. Keeping the number of initialized components to a minimum saves computer memory. It also
saves computational effort when generating plots that span multiple components. For example, having
only one component initialized in a domain with many components restricts calculations and plots to
just the initialized component.
Uninitialization does not cause graphic objects to be deleted. A graphic object that disappears due to
the uninitialization of a turbo component reappears if the component is initialized.
1. Select the boundary names that correspond to the required turbo regions. To select multiple regions,
click the icon to the right of the drop-down list and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the regions.
2. In the Background Mesh frame for each of the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet curves, choose to specify
each to be From Turbo Region or From Line (that is, from a predefined line). If From Line is chosen,
choose the line locator.
Additional information on Individual Component Initialization is available in the Details View for Indi-
vidual Component Initialization (p. 296) section; for details, see:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Initialization
• The hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet curves and other regions for a turbo component (such as a rotor or stator).
For details, see Turbo Regions Frame (p. 297).
The background mesh is a mesh generated on a constant-Theta projection of the passage, used to
define spanwise and meridional coordinates for the 3D geometry. For details, see Background Mesh
Frame (p. 297).
• The Blade region specification is used to enable macros and plots that deal with blades (for example, a
blade loading macro).
• The intersections of the Hub, Shroud, Inlet and Outlet regions with Periodic 1 may be used in
order to generate internal polylines that are then collapsed in the Theta direction to form the boundaries
of the background mesh. Alternatively, or if any of these intersections are not possible, polylines/lines may
be specified explicitly in the Background Mesh frame. For details, see Background Mesh Frame (p. 297).
In the special case of a turbo component that wraps 360 degrees around the rotation axis, there may
be no periodic regions available. In this case, you may do one of the following:
2. Specify the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet regions. Create a rectangularly-bounded slice plane, using the
point-and-normal method, such that it intersects the turbo component on only one side of the rotation
axis. In this case, it may be helpful to temporarily set the plane type to Sample so that you can see the
entire plane. After the plane is in the correct position, set the type to Slice. Finally, specify this slice
plane as Periodic 1. You do not need to set Periodic 2.
3. Specify polylines for the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet in the Background Mesh frame (described next).
In order to calculate Streamwise Location ( ) and Span coordinates for a turbo component, a separate
2D mesh is created as an intermediate step. The mesh, here referred to as a background mesh, is formed
by taking the 3D passage boundaries (hub, shroud, inlet, outlet) and collapsing them in the Theta dir-
ection, forming a 2D passage outline on an axial-radial plane. The outline is then filled in with a mesh
consisting of lines of constant span and meridional coordinate. The resulting mesh is then used to as-
sociate Streamwise Location and Span coordinates with any 3D position in the passage.
The background mesh frame requires you to specify how the hub, shroud, inlet, and outlet curves will
be obtained. The two available options are:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Turbo Workspace
When From Turbo Region is specified for a particular curve, that curve is automatically extracted
by intersecting the corresponding turbo region (specified in the Turbo Regions frame) with the
specified Periodic 1 region (also specified in the Turbo Regions frame).
• From Line
When From Line is specified for a particular curve, you must provide a polyline/line locator for
that curve. You must use the latter method for every curve that cannot be derived by the first
method (for example, because one or more Turbo Regions are not specified).
A line or polyline used to generate a background mesh must follow the entire surface it represents
(along the component). One way in which a polyline can be created is by using the intersection between
a bounded plane (such as a slice plane or a turbo surface of constant Theta) and the appropriate surface
(for example, the hub surface). Before the polyline is used for initialization, is transformed by adjusting
all Theta coordinates to the same value. The Theta coordinates of the polyline, therefore, have no effect;
polylines obtained by intersection with a plane need not use a constant-Theta plane. If you cannot form
the polyline easily, you can save pieces of the polyline to a series of files, use an editor to consolidate
the parts, and then reload the edited file. For details, see:
• Linear
• Quasi Orthogonal
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo View Shortcuts
The figure on the left shows a background mesh (for clarity, Density was set to 200) using the Linear
method, while the figure on the right shows the mesh using the Orthogonal (default) method. As can
be seen from pictures, the Quasi Orthogonal method offers a higher-quality meridional space repres-
entation, especially in highly curved passages.
The density of the background mesh influences the accuracy of the representation of the meridional
space and, therefore, the accuracy of the nonlinear coordinate transformations. The default offered for
Density should be sufficient in most cases.
The Instancing tab for a turbo component is the same as the Instancing tab for a domain (see Instancing
Tab (p. 27)) and similar to the Definition tab for an Instance Transform object (see Instance Transform:
Definition Tab (p. 214)). (The Definition tab for an Instance Transform object is different in that its Axis
Definition settings and Instance Definition settings cannot be set from a results file.)
By default, the Axis Definition and Instance Definition settings are automatically determined from
the results file. To set your own axis definition, set Axis Definition to Custom. To set your own instance
definition, set Instance Definition to Custom.
The instancing information specified for a component applies to graphic objects (or parts thereof )
generated over the component. In order for this instancing information to apply to a graphic object:
• At least part of the graphic object must be generated using data from the component (that is, there must
be an association between the graphic object and the component).
• The graphic object must have Apply Instancing Transform selected and Transform set to an Instance
Transform that has Instancing Info From Domain selected.
The instancing information for a component is the same as the instancing information for the compon-
ent’s domain, and the instancing information for any other component in the same domain.
For a list of the other commands that appear in the Turbo tree view (and in most tree views), see
Common Tree View Shortcuts (p. 16).
Command Description
Initialize Initializes the selected turbo components. For details, see Individual Component
Initialization (Advanced Feature) (p. 296).
Uninitialize Uninitializes the selected turbo components. For details, see Uninitializing
Components (p. 296).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Turbo Workspace
Command Description
Initialize All Initializes all turbo components. For details, see Initialize All Components (p. 295).
Uninitialize All Uninitializes all turbo components. For details, see Uninitializing
Components (p. 296).
Show in Separate Displays the selected plot or chart in its own window.
Window
Promote to Gener- Copies the selected plot object and any required supporting objects (for example,
al Mode a line locator) to the Outline workspace. This would enable, for example, the
selected plot to be included in a report.
Note
Blade Aligned Turbo Surfaces can fail due to the following limitations:
• The extraction of leading and trailing edges of the blade is sensitive to tip clearance and to the
curvature of the edges.
• The normalization of coordinates is sensitive to blade extend comparing to inlet and outlet extend
(that is, when the edges are too close to inlet/outlet).
You can always use the Streamwise Location coordinate when the quality of the blade aligned
coordinates are in doubt.
• Constant Span
• Constant Theta
• Cone
The Constant Span, Constant Streamwise Location, and Constant Theta options are
similar to planes in that they can be bounded and have Slice or Sample types. For details, see
Type (p. 302).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Surface
13.5.1.1. Domains
See Selecting Domains (p. 19).
13.5.1.2. Definition
• Constant Span creates a surface at a fractional span value between the hub and shroud. For details, see
Span Normalized (p. 305).
• Constant Streamwise Location creates a surface at a fractional streamwise distance between the
inlet and outlet. For details, see Streamwise Location (p. 305).
• Constant Blade Aligned create surfaces that is aligned with the leading and trailing edges of the
blade. If the blade is curved, the surfaces will also be curved.
• Constant Blade Aligned Linear create surfaces that is aligned with the leading and trailing edges
of the blade. If the blade is curved, the surfaces will be flat and aligned to run through the middle of the
curves.
• Constant Theta creates a surface at a specific Theta value. For details, see Theta (p. 305).
• Cone uses the two supplied points to create a line. The cone is created where the user-defined line intersects
the axis of rotation and Point 2:
The user-defined line is then rotated about the axis of origin to create the cone. If the line is parallel
to the axis of rotation, a cylinder is created. If the line is normal to the axis of rotation, a disc is created.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
Turbo Workspace
The line can be described by Cartesian or cylindrical components. When entering cylindrical coordinates,
only the axial distance and radius are required. The points can be entered or picked directly from the
viewer.
Note
Constant Theta and Cone methods are available even before turbo initialization has
been performed because these methods do not depend on span or streamwise coordinates.
13.5.1.3. Bounds
The available types of Bounds for the Turbo Surface to be created can be seen by clicking next to
the Type box.
• When None is selected, the Turbo Surface cuts through a complete cross-section of each domain specified
in the Domains list. The Turbo Surface is bounded only by the limits of the domain.
• Using Rectangular, you can enter the maximum and minimum value for the two dimensions on the
Turbo Surface. The Turbo Surface is undefined in areas where the rectangle extends outside of the domains
specified in the Domains list.
The Invert Surface Bounds check box reverses the effect of the surface bound. The surface is defined
only in regions outside the bounding constraints.
13.5.1.4. Type
You can set the Type to either Slice or Sample.
Slice extends the Turbo Surface in all directions until it reaches the edge of the domain. Points on
the Turbo Surface correspond to points where the Turbo Surface intersects an edge of the mesh. As
a result, the number of points in a slice Turbo Surface is indirectly proportional to the mesh spacing.
Sample creates the Turbo Surface with rectangular bounds. The density of points on the Turbo Surface
corresponds to the size of the bounds for your Turbo Surface in each of the Turbo Surface directions,
and the value in the Samples box for each of the two directions that describe the Turbo Surface. You
can type in the value in the Samples box, increase or decrease the value by 1 by clicking or re-
spectively, or use the embedded slider (which has a maximum value of 998 and a minimum value of
2). A sample Turbo Surface is a set of evenly-spaced points which are independent of the mesh spacing.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Line
2. Define the line. The options available for the Method are:
• Inlet to Outlet, which creates a line at specific Span Normalized (p. 305) and Theta (p. 305) value, over a
range of streamwise values.
Select the number of points along the line per component with the value you enter in the
Samples/Comp box. The sample line is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points that are independent
of the mesh spacing.
• Hub to Shroud, which creates a line of a specific Mode at a specific Theta (p. 305) value. The method for
creating a line in this way is the same as for the locator line in a hub-to-shroud turbo chart. For details
on the possible Mode settings, see Hub to Shroud Turbo Charts (p. 309).
Tip
If you set a mesh-density based turbo line and want to be able to see the points of
analysis so that you can set an appropriate amount of reduction, you can create a
vector (Insert > Vector) and define its Location to be the turbo line.
• Circumferential, which creates a line at specific streamwise and span values, over a range of Theta values.
The number of samples is required. The number of points along the line will correspond to the value
you enter in the Samples box. The sample line is a set of evenly-spaced sampling points that are inde-
pendent of the mesh spacing. For details, see:
• When None is selected, the Turbo Line is restricted to only the parameters specified in the Definition
section of the form. The Turbo Line is not bounded by the limits of the domain if the conditions you
specify describe locations outside of the domain.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Turbo Workspace
• When End Points is selected, you can define the ends of the Turbo Line by entering the maximum
and minimum for the dimension making up the line. The Turbo Line is visible but will be colored with
an undefined color in areas where the line extends outside of the domains specified in the Domains list.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Plots
13.7.1.3.5. Theta
Theta is the angular coordinate measured about the axis of rotation following the right-hand rule.
The Theta variable is intentionally generated by CFD-Post to have the following two properties:
• Continuously increasing values of Theta independent of the total blade wrap. This is particularly useful for
high-wrap blades.
Because of these properties, the Theta variable generated in CFD-Post is most likely different than that
of a user-defined expression based on the Cartesian coordinates.
After turbo initialization, the Theta range starts at a small but non-zero value. To set the Theta range
to exactly zero, use the command >turbo update_theta.
• A 3D View, which is described in 3D View Object (p. 306), is the same as the standard viewer, with 3D manip-
ulation available using the rotate, translate and zoom functions.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Turbo Workspace
• A Blade-to-Blade 2D view, which is described in Blade-to-Blade Object (p. 306). The horizontal axis shows
streamwise location and the vertical axis shows Theta. The 2D view enables translation, zoom, and rotation
around the axis normal to the blade-to-blade view. Other rotations are not possible.
• A Meridional 2D view, which is described in Meridional Object (p. 307). The horizontal axis shows axial distance
and the vertical axis shows the radius. The view will allow the same transformations as the blade-to-blade
view, with rotation possible around the axis normal to the meridional view.
The three views listed above are also listed in the Turbo tree view as objects under Plots. The Blade-
to-Blade and Meridional objects can be copied into the Outline tree view by right-clicking and selecting
Promote to General Mode.
After creating the blade-to-blade object (select the Three Views toggle in the Initialization object), you
can view the blade-to-blade object in the 3D View object by setting the appropriate option in the 3D
View object.
Note that you can view chart location lines in the 3D View object by setting the appropriate option in
the 3D View object.
To select more than one domain, click the multiple select icon and pick the entities.
2. Choose the fractional Span (0 to 1) where the plot is located. The Plot Type can be one of the following:
13.7.4.1. Span
Set the fractional distance between the hub and shroud. For details, see Span Normalized (p. 305).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Plots
13.7.4.3.2. Contour
Contour lines are drawn on the location described by the surface plot. Additional information on the
option is available in Contour Command (p. 189).
13.7.4.3.3. Vector
A vector plot is created on the location described by the surface plot. For details, see Vector Com-
mand (p. 186).
13.7.4.3.4. Stream
A plot of streamlines are drawn on the location described by the surface plot. For details, see Streamline
Command (p. 193).
To select multiple domains, click the Location editor icon (beside the Domains setting) then use
Shift and/or Ctrl while selecting domains.
Note that, for the Meridional object, sampling points are always distributed by equal distance.
In order to obtain values for variables on the meridional surface, circumferential averaging is used. The
types of circumferential averaging are:
• Length
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
Turbo Workspace
Circumferential averaging is carried out in the same way as for a Hub to Shroud turbo chart (see
Circumferential Averaging by Length: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart (p. 315)) except that the sampling
points are always distributed by equal distance.
• Area (default)
A variable value at each sampling point is calculated as an area average over the corresponding cir-
cular band. The band is constructed as for a Hub to Shroud turbo chart (see Circumferential Averaging
by Area: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart (p. 315)) except that the sampling points are always distributed
by equal distance.
• Mass
A variable value at each sampling point is calculated as a mass flow average over the corresponding
circular band. The band is constructed as for a Hub to Shroud turbo chart (see Circumferential Aver-
aging by Mass Flow: Hub to Shroud Turbo Chart (p. 315)) except that the sampling points are always
distributed by equal distance.
• Blade wireframe
• Sample mesh
A special variable, Streamwise (0-1) is available as the X Variable used in blade loading plots.
This is a streamwise coordinate that follows the blade surface; it can be used as a substitute for the
axial coordinate (for example, X) or the variable Chart Count. The streamwise coordinate is based
on the meridional coordinate, and is normalized so that it ranges from 0 at the leading edge to 1 at
the trailing edge of the blade.
Note
The Theta extents of the chart line are set to the Theta extents of the domain or, in the case
of data instancing, the Theta extents of the expanded set of domains. Some of the sample
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Plots
points may fall outside the domain. To see the circumferential chart line, edit the Plots >
3D View object and turn on Show chart location lines.
13.7.6.3.2. Display
If you have selected Two Lines, you can set Display to:
• Separate Lines
• Difference (S2–S1)
Displays the difference in the circumferentially averaged variable between the two locations, relative
to the first line’s location.
• Ratio (S2/S1)
Displays the ratio of the difference in the circumferentially averaged variable between the two locations,
relative to the first line’s location.
When Display is set to Difference (S2–S1) or Ratio (S2/S1), you can set the Compare option
to X Values or to Y Values. The selected values will be compared between the two lines.
13.7.6.3.3. Mode
Set Mode to one of the following options:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Turbo Workspace
The Two Points Linear option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be a straight line, specified by
two points: one on the hub and one on the shroud. The Point Type setting (described below) specifies
the coordinate system for interpreting the specified points.
The Blade Aligned Linear option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be specified by a curve of
constant Linear BA Streamwise Location coordinate. For details, see Linear BA Streamwise Location
Coordinates (p. 315).
• Blade Aligned
The Blade Aligned option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be specified by a curve of constant
BA Streamwise Location coordinate. For details, see BA Streamwise Location Coordinates (p. 316).
• Streamwise Location
The Streamwise Location option causes the hub-to-shroud line to be specified by a curve of
constant streamwise coordinate. Here, the streamwise coordinate system is derived from a “background
mesh”. For details, see Background Mesh Frame (p. 297).
Note
• Blade Aligned coordinates may not always be available, depending on the case geometry. In
particular, if the blade tip clearance is large or uneven between the leading and trailing edges,
CFD-Post may not be able to detect the blade edge lines. In this case you will not be able to use
Blade Aligned coordinates in turbo surface or turbo chart specification.
• In turbo line, turbo surface, and related editors, the Blade Aligned coordinate values that you
enter in the input fields (and the related CCL parameters) are normalized to the blade's leading
and trailing edge locations with predefined constant references: 0.25 and 0.75 are taken to be
the blades leading and trailing edges, respectively. The normalization of the input values is to
enable a consistent reference to the leading and trailing edges regardless of specific cases. These
values are conventions, not real blade aligned coordinated values; the normalized values are
translated by the engine to create the real Blade Aligned coordinate values before constructing
turbo lines and turbo surfaces.
• AR
When the AR option is selected, the hub and shroud points are specified in AR (axial, radial) coordin-
ates.
• XYZ
When the XYZ option is selected, you specify the x, y, and z coordinates of the line's end points.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Plots
When the Blade Aligned Linear option is selected, the hub and shroud points are specified,
each by a single Linear BA Streamwise Location coordinate. For details, see Linear BA Streamwise
Location Coordinates (p. 315).
• Streamwise Location
When the Streamwise Location option is selected, the hub and shroud points are specified,
each by a single streamwise coordinate. Here, the streamwise coordinate system is derived from a
“background mesh”. For details, see Background Mesh Frame (p. 297).
13.7.6.3.5. Theta
The Theta (p. 305) setting is available with the Hub to Shroud methods.
13.7.6.3.6. Samples
The Samples setting controls the number of sampling points between the hub and shroud.
13.7.6.3.7. Streamwise
The Streamwise fields enable you to set the locations to compare when Display is set to Difference
or Ratio.
13.7.6.3.8. Distribution
Each sampling point value is evaluated from a corresponding circular band. The Distribution setting
controls how the sampling points and their corresponding bands are distributed from hub to shroud
(at the same streamwise coordinate).
• Equal Distance
The Equal Distance option (default) causes the sampling points to be distributed at uniform
distances along a hub-to-shroud path. For circumferential averaging purposes, contiguous circular
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Turbo Workspace
bands are internally constructed, one for each sampling point, concentric about the rotation axis,
width-centered (in the spanwise direction) about each sampling point, each band having the same
width or spanwise extent.
The Equal Mass Flow option causes the sampling points to be distributed along a hub-to-shroud
path such that contiguous circular bands can be internally constructed, one for each sampling point,
concentric about the rotation axis, width-centered (in the spanwise direction) about each sampling
point, with an equal mass flow through each band (except possibly the first and last bands). See Include
Boundary Points, below.
Note
CFD-Post cannot create an Equal Mass Flow point distribution for some cases:
– When there is a cross-section recirculation and the total mass flow on the section is near zero,
the point distribution will fail.
– When there is a mass flow 'spike' on the section (usually this is caused by an ill-defined solution),
the equal mass distribution will be impractical.
– When too many sample points are requested over a small area.
• Equal Area
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Plots
The Equal Area option causes the sampling points to be distributed along a hub-to-shroud path
such that contiguous circular bands can be internally constructed, one for each sampling point,
concentric about the rotation axis, width-centered (in the spanwise direction) about each sampling
point, with an equal area for each band (except possibly the first and last bands). See Include
Boundary Points, below.
The Mesh Density Based option causes the sampling points to be distributed along a hub-to-
shroud path such that the sampling point density is proportional to the mesh node density along
either
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
Turbo Workspace
The Factor setting specifies the ratio of mesh nodes to sampling points along the hub-to-shroud
path. A value of 1 causes one sampling point to be created per mesh node. You can reduce the
computational time by setting a larger reduction factor.
Note
For Two-Line Hub to Shroud plots, you may not be able to create Difference and Ratio
plots using Reduction Factor if the two lines are in different domains.
When Distribution is set to Equal Mass Flow or Equal Area, the Include Boundary Points
option is available. This option shifts all of the bands so that the first and last sampling points are on
the hub and shroud. The first and last bands are then “half” the size of the other bands (in terms of the
particular measure used in the band construction: distance, mass flow, or area). See Figure 13.1: Sampling
Point Distribution with Include Boundary Nodes Option (p. 314).
Figure 13.1: Sampling Point Distribution with Include Boundary Nodes Option
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Plots
For more details on the convention that 0.25 and 0.75 are taken to be the blades leading and trailing
edges, see Mode (p. 309).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
Turbo Workspace
For more details on the convention that 0.25 and 0.75 are taken to be the blades leading and trailing
edges, see Mode (p. 309).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Turbo Macros
Note
Turbo initialization automatically sets up the performance macros in such a way that you
have to define only a limited number of parameters. For details, see:
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
Turbo Workspace
Note
To get velocity units for tip speed derived from R and Omega quantities, you can divide the
expression by 1 [rad] to eliminate the angle units from the expression. For example, use:
tipVel = Radius * omega / 1 [rad]
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Calculate Velocity Components
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
Turbo Workspace
The velocity in the meridional plane can be represented by axial and radial components or streamwise
and spanwise components:
(13.1)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Calculate Velocity Components
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
Turbo Workspace
The velocity in the blade-to-blade plane can be represented by streamwise and circumferential compon-
ents:
(13.2)
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Calculate Velocity Components
(13.3)
Axial, radial and meridional velocities are not calculated for Velocity in Stn. Frame because these
components are not different from the regular Velocity components.
Information on calculating velocity components using CCL is available. For details, see Calculating Velocity
Components.
The range of Velocity Flow Angle is from -180° to +180°. Four examples are shown in Figure 13.10: Ve-
locity Flow Angle Sign in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane (p. 324).
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
Turbo Workspace
Figure 13.10: Velocity Flow Angle Sign in Each Quadrant on the Blade-to-Blade Plane
1. Load a results file for an axisymmetric simulation. (You can load a copy of StaticMixer_001.res
(provided with a tutorial) to work through this example.)
2. Select the Turbo tab to open the Turbo workspace. A dialog box asks if you want to auto-initialize all
components, but as this is unnecessary click No.
3. On the Turbo workspace's Initialization area, click Define Global Rotational Axis.
4. In the Define Global Rotational Axis dialog box, select the appropriate axis and click OK. (For the static
mixer example, set Axis to Z.)
5. In the Initialization area, click Calculate Velocity Components. New variables such as Velocity Circum-
ferential become available. (You can see these new variables in the Variables workspace.)
a. From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane. In the dialog box that appears, accept the
default name and click OK.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Calculate Velocity Components
b. In the details view for Plane 1 on the Geometry tab, ensure that Method is YZ Plane.
c. On the Color tab, set Mode to Variable and Variable to Velocity Circumferential.
d. Click Apply. The plane is colored to show the velocity at each point.
e. Right-click the viewer background and select Predefined Camera > View From +X so that the plane
is easier to see.
Important
Not all axisymmetric cases can have velocity components calculated in this way. In particular,
cases that involve particles (such as smoke) will fail.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 14: CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post
CFX Expression Language (CEL) is an interpreted, declarative language that has been developed to enable
CFX users to enhance their simulations without recourse to writing and linking separate external Fortran
routines. You can use CEL expressions anywhere a value is required for input in ANSYS CFX.
The CFX Command Language (CCL) is the internal communication and command language of CFD-Post.
It is a simple language that can be used to create objects or perform actions in the postprocessor. All
CCL statements can be classified into one of three categories:
• Object and parameter definitions, which are described in Object Creation and Deletion (p. 327).
• CCL actions, which are commands that perform a specific task (such as reading a session file), and which
are described in Command Actions.
• Power Syntax programming, which uses the Perl programming language to allow loops, logic, and custom
macros (subroutines). Power Syntax enables you to embed Perl commands into CCL to achieve powerful
quantitative postprocessing. For details, see Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX.
State files and session files contain object definitions in CCL. In addition, session files can also contain
CCL action commands. You can view and modify the CCL in these files by using a text editor, and you
can use CCL to create your own session and state files to read into CFD-Post.
Tip
Advanced users can interact with CFD-Post directly by entering CCL in the Command Editor
dialog box (see Command Editor (p. 291)), or by running CFD-Post in Line Interface mode
(see Line Interface Mode).
You can modify an existing object by entering the object definition with the modified parameter settings
into the Command Editor dialog box. Only those parameters that are to be changed need to be entered.
All other parameters will remain unchanged.
There may be a significant degree of interaction between objects in CFD-Post. For example, a vector
plot may depend on the location of an underlying plane, or an isosurface may depend on the definition
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post
of a CEL expression. If changes to one object affect other objects, the other objects will be updated
automatically.
To delete an object, type >delete <ObjectName>. If you delete an object that is used by other
objects, warnings will result, but the object will still be deleted.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 15: CFX Expression Language (CEL) in CFD-Post
This chapter provides information that is specific to CFX Expression Language (CEL) use in CFD-Post.
For details on the CFX Expression Language, see CFX Expression Language (CEL). A list of variables
available for use in CEL expression is available in Variables and Predefined Expressions Available in CEL
Expressions.
• Set any numeric parameter in a CFD-Post object based on an expression (and the object will update if the
expression result changes).
• Use the variables x, y, and z in general CEL expressions. Additionally, you can use user-defined coordinate
frames with the CEL functions. For details, see Quantitative CEL Functions in ANSYS CFX.
However, you cannot use CEL to solve systems of equations in CFD-Post—CEL expressions are purely
algebraic operations.
All expressions in the post-processor are defined in the EXPRESSIONS singleton object (which is also
a sub-object of LIBRARY:CEL). Each expression is a simple name = expression statement within
that object. New expressions are added by defining new parameters within the expressions object (the
EXPRESSIONS object is special in that it does not have a predefined list of valid parameters).
Note
Important
Because Power Syntax uses Perl mathematical operators, you should exercise caution when
combining CEL with Power Syntax expressions. For example, in CEL, 22 is represented as
2^2, but in Perl, would be written 2**2. If you are unsure about the validity of an operator
in Perl, consult a Perl reference guide.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
CFX Expression Language (CEL) in CFD-Post
Name Description
Area This is meaningful only for surface locators (user surface, plane, isosurface,
boundary). The value at each node is equal to the sum of sector areas
associated with the node (a sector area is the portion of area of a face
touching a node that can be associated with that node). There is a function
to sum this variable over a 2D locator to obtain the area of the locator; for
details, see area in the CFX Reference Guide.
Force There is a function for calculating force; for details, see force in the CFX
Reference Guide.
Length This is meaningful only for polyline and line objects. The value on each line
node is equal to the sum of halfs of the two line segments joined at the
node. There is a function to sum this variable over a line locator to obtain
the length of the locator; for details, see length in the CFX Reference Guide.
Mass Flow There is a function for calculating mass flow; for details, see massFlow in
the CFX Reference Guide.
Normal This is meaningful only for surface locators (user surface, plane, isosurface,
boundary). It is a vector variable defining the surface unit normal at each
node in the locator.
Volume This is defined only on volume locators (volume, domain, subdomain). The
value at each node is equal to the sum of the sector volumes associated
with the node (a sector volume is the portion of volume of an element
touching a node that can be associated with that node). There is a function
to sum this variable over a 3D locator to obtain the volume of the locator;
for details, see volume in the CFX Reference Guide.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 16: Command Actions
You can use command actions to edit or create graphic objects and to perform some typical actions
(such as reading or creating session and state files).
• You can enter command action statements into the Tools > Command Editor dialog box. All such actions
must be preceded with the > symbol.
For details on the Command Editor dialog box, see Command Editor. Additional information on
editing and creating graphics objects using the CFX Command Language in the Command Editor
dialog box is available in CFX Command Language (CCL) in CFD-Post.
• Command actions also appear in session files (where they are also preceded by the > character).
• When running CFD-Post in Line Interface mode, the CFX> command prompt is shown in a DOS window
or UNIX shell. All the actions described in this section along with some additional commands can be entered
at the command prompt. You do not have to precede commands with the > symbol when running in Line
Interface mode. Additional information on using Line Interface mode is available in Line Interface
Mode (p. 341).
Note
In addition to command action statements, CCL takes advantage of the full range of capab-
ilities and resources from an existing programming language, Perl. Perl statements can be
embedded in between lines of simple syntax, providing capabilities such as loops, logic, and
much, much more with any CCL input file. These Power Syntax commands are preceded by
the ! symbol. Additional information on using Power Syntax in the Command Editor dialog
box is available in Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.
Many actions require additional information to perform their task (such as the name of a file to load or
the type of file to create). By default, these actions get the necessary information from a specific asso-
ciated CCL singleton object. For convenience, some actions accept a few arguments that are used to
optionally override the commonly changed object settings. If multiple arguments for an action are
specified, they must be separated by a comma (,). Lines starting with the # character are not interpreted
and can be used for comments.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
Command Actions
For example, all the settings for >print are read from the HARDCOPY: object. However, if you desire,
you can specify the name of the hardcopy file as an argument to >print. The following CCL example
demonstrates this behavior of actions:
# Define settings for printing
HARDCOPY:
Hardcopy Format= jpg
Hardcopy Filename = default.jpg
Image Scale = 70
White Background = Off
END
#Create an output file based on the settings in HARDCOPY
>print
#Create an identical output file with a different filename.
>print another_file.jpg
If a timestep is not specified, a value of -1 is assumed (this corresponds to the Final state).
When a results file is loaded, all Domain, Boundary, and Variable objects associated with the results
file are created or updated. Variable objects are created, but the associated data is not actually read
into the post-processor until the variables are used (load-on-demand). Variables will be pre-loaded if
specified in the DATA READER.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box
Tip
If going from a transient to steady-state results file, you should specify the timestep to be -
1 (if this is not the current setting). If you do not explicitly set this, you will get a warning
message stating that the existing timestep does not exist. The -1 timestep will then be loaded.
>load timestep=4
Performs session file reading and executing. The following option is available:
• filename = <filename>
Specifies the filename and path to the file that should be read and executed. If no filename is specified,
the SESSION singleton object indicates the file to use. If no SESSION singleton exists, an error will
be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
Reads the session file specified in the SESSION singleton, and execute its contents. If the SESSION
object does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>readsession filename=mysession.cse
State files can be used to quickly load a previous state into CFD-Post. State files can be generated
manually using a text editor, or from within CFD-Post by saving a state file. The commands required to
save to these files from the Command Editor dialog box are described below.
The >savestate command is used to write the current CFD-Post state to a file. The >savestate
action supports the following options:
If mode is none, the executor creates a new state file, and if the specified file exists, an error will be
raised. If mode is overwrite, the executor creates a new state file, and if the file exists, it will be
deleted and replaced with the latest state information.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
Command Actions
• filename = <filename>
Specifies the path and name of the file that the state is to be written to. If no filename is specified,
the STATE singleton object will be queried for the filename. If the STATE singleton does not exist,
then an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
Writes the current state information to the filename specified in the STATE singleton. If the mode in
the STATE singleton is none, and the filename exists, an error will be returned. If the mode in the
STATE singleton is overwrite, and the filename exists, the existing file will be deleted, and the state
information will be written to the file. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised in-
dicating that a filename must be specified.
>savestate mode=none
Writes the current state information to the file specified in the STATE singleton. If the file already exists,
an error will be raised. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a
filename must be specified.
>savestate mode=overwrite
Writes the current state information to the file specified in the STATE singleton. If the file already exists,
it will be deleted, and the current state information will be saved in its place. If the STATE singleton
does not exist, an error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>savestate filename=mystate.cst
Writes the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the STATE singleton exists, and the
savestate mode is set to none, and the file already exists, the command causes an error. If the
savestate mode is set to overwrite, and the file already exists, the file will be deleted, and the
current state information will be saved in its place. If the STATE singleton does not exist, then the
system assumes a savestate mode of none, and behave as described above.
>savestate mode=none, filename=mystate.cst
Writes the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the file already exists, the command
causes an error.
>savestate mode=overwrite, filename=mystate.cst
Writes the current state information to the mystate.cst file. If the file already exists, it will be deleted,
and the current state information will be saved in its place.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box
If a DATA READER singleton has been stored in the state file, the load action will be invoked to load
the contents of the results file.
If a state file contains BOUNDARY objects, and the state file is appended to the current state (with no
new DATA READER object), some boundaries defined may not be valid for the loaded results.
BOUNDARY objects that are not valid for the currently loaded results file will be culled.
If mode is set to overwrite, the executor deletes all the objects that currently exist in the system,
and load the objects saved in the state file. Overwrite mode is the default mode if none is explicitly
specified. If mode is set to append, the executor adds the objects saved in the state file to the objects
that already exist in the system. If the mode is set to append and the state file contains objects that
already exist in the system, the following logic will determine the final result:
If the system has an equivalent object (the name and type), then the object already in the system
will be modified with the parameters saved in the state file. If the system has an equivalent object
in name only, then the object that already exists in the system will be deleted, and replaced with
that in the state file.
• filename = <filename>
If load is set to true and a DATA READER object is defined in the state file, then the results file will
be loaded when the state file is read. If load is set to false, the results file will not be loaded, and
the DATA READER object that currently is in the object database (if any) will not be updated.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
Command Actions
The readstate mode parameter in the STATE singleton determines if the current objects in the
system are deleted before the objects defined in the mystate.cst file are loaded into the system. If
the STATE singleton does not exist, then the system objects are deleted before loading the new state
information.
>readstate mode=overwrite, filename=mystate.cst
Deletes all objects currently in the system, opens the mystate.cst file if it exists, and creates the
objects as stored in the state file.
>readstate mode=append, filename=mystate.cst
Opens the mystate.cst file, if it exists, and adds the objects defined in the file to those already in
the system following the rules specified in the previous table.
>readstate
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
File Operations from the Command Editor Dialog Box
Overwrites or appends to the objects in the system using the objects defined in the file referenced by
the state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an
error will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>readstate mode=overwrite
Overwrites the objects in the system STATE using the objects defined in the file referenced by the
state filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error
will be raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
>readstate mode=append
Appends to the objects in the system using the objects defined in the file referenced by the state
filename parameter in the STATE singleton. If the STATE singleton does not exist, an error will be
raised indicating that a filename must be specified.
This command reads solution data up to the last solved iteration into CFD-Post with different behaviour
depending on whether you specify true or false.
This command starts or stops solution monitoring auto update. For more information on solution
monitoring control, see CFD-Post Monitor Menu (p. 133).
Creates a file of the current viewer contents. Settings for output format, quality, and so on, are read
from the HARDCOPY singleton object.
The optional argument <filename> can be used to specify the name of the output file to override
that stored in HARDCOPY. HARDCOPY must exist before print is executed.
type
Indicates whether to import the file as an Ansys file or Generic file.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
Command Actions
filename
The name of the file to import.
object name
The name to give the USER SURFACE object that is created as a result of importing the file.
boundary
The name of the CFD-Post boundary/region to associate with the imported ANSYS surface. This association
is used during an ANSYS file import to project data from the ANSYS surface onto the CFD-Post boundary/re-
gion. The same association is used during an ANSYS file export, when data from the CFD-Post boundary/re-
gion is projected back onto the ANSYS surface.
conserve flux
Boolean to indicate whether or not to ensure that the heat fluxes associated with the imported ANSYS
geometry remain conservative relative to the fluxes on the associated CFD-Post Boundary.
The first (top-left) viewport is represented by the VIEWER singleton, while others are VIEWPORT objects.
For example, to modify filtering in the first viewport, changes should be made to the VIEWER singleton.
For all other viewports, changes are made to the VIEWPORT objects, which are numbered from 1-3 in
a clockwise direction.
To filter the bottom-right viewport when all four viewports are active:
VIEWPORT:Viewport 2
Draw All Objects=false
Object Name List=Wireframe
END
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Other Commands
The >calculate command is used to perform function calculations in the Command Editor dialog
box. Typing >calculate alone performs the calculation using the parameters stored in the CALCU
LATOR singleton object. Entering >calculate <function name> will not work if required argu-
ments are needed by the function.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Command Actions
The >delete command can be used in the Command Editor dialog box to delete objects. The command
must be supplied with a list of object names separated by commas. An error message will be displayed
if the list contains any invalid object names, but the deletion of valid objects in the list will still be
processed.
Invokes the Chart Viewer and displays the specified Chart object. Chart objects and Chart Lines are
created like other CCL objects.
Issuing the >turbo more vars command is equivalent to selecting the Calculate Velocity
Components in the Turbo workspace. For details, see Calculate Velocity Components.
Issuing the >turbo init command is equivalent to selecting Initialize All Components from the
Turbo menu. For details, see Initialize All Components.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 17: Line Interface Mode
This chapter contains information on how to perform typical user actions (loading, printing, and so on),
create graphical objects, and perform quantitative calculations when running CFD-Post in Line Interface
mode.
All of the functionality of CFD-Post can be accessed when running in Line Interface mode. In Line Interface
mode, you are simply entering the commands that would otherwise be issued by the user interface. A
viewer is provided in a separate window that will show the geometry and the objects that are created
on the command line.
You may want to change the size of the MS-DOS window to view the output from commands such
as getstate. This can be done by entering mode con lines=X at the command prompt before
entering CFD-Post, where X is the number of lines to display in the window. You may choose a large
number of lines if you want to be able to see all the output from a session (a scroll bar will appear
in the DOS window). Note that once inside CFD-Post, filepaths should contain a forward slash / (and
not the backslash that is required in MS-DOS).
In CFD-Post Line Interface mode, all commands are assumed to be actions, the > symbol required in
the Command Editor dialog box is not needed. To call up a list of valid commands, type help at the
command prompt.
All of the functionality available from the Command Editor dialog box in the user interface is available
in Line Interface mode by typing enterccl or e at the command prompt. When in e mode, you can
enter any set of valid CCL commands. The commands are not processed until you leave e mode by
typing .e. You can cancel e mode without processing the commands by typing .c. For details, see
Command Editor.
An explanation and list of command actions are available. For details, see Overview of Command Ac-
tions (p. 331). (The action commands shown in this link are preceded by a > symbol. This should be
omitted when entering action commands at the command prompt.)
You can create objects by entering the CCL definition of the object when in e mode, or by reading the
object definition from a session or state file. For details, see File Operations from the Command Editor
Dialog Box (p. 332).
In summary, Line Interface mode differs from the Command Editor dialog box because Line Interface
action commands are not preceded by a > symbol. In the same way, when entering lines of CCL or
Power Syntax, e must be typed (whereas this is not required in the Command Editor dialog box). It
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Line Interface Mode
should be noted that these are the only principal differences, and all commands that work for the
Command Editor dialog box will also work in Line Interface mode, providing the correct syntax is used.
Viewer Hotkeys
The zoom, rotate, pan and other mouse actions available for manipulating the Viewer in the user interface
perform identical functions in the Viewer in Line Interface mode. In addition to this, hotkeys can be used
to manipulate other aspects of the Viewer. For a full list of all the hotkeys available, click in the Viewer to
make it the active window and select the ? icon. To execute a hotkey command, click once in the Viewer
(or on the object, as some functions are object-specific) and type the command.
Calculator
When functions are evaluated from the command line, the result is simply printed to standard output.
For a list of valid calculator functions and required parameters, type calculate help at the
command prompt. Additional information is available; for details, see Quantitative Calculations in
the Command Editor Dialog Box (p. 339).
Viewing a Chart
You can view a chart object in the Chart Viewer using the chart <ChartObjectName> command.
Example The following example provides a set of commands that you could enter at the CFX>
command prompt. The output written to the screen when executing these commands is not shown.
CFX> load filename=c:/MyFiles/StaticMixer.res
CFX> getstate StaticMixer Default
CFX> e
BOUNDARY:StaticMixer Default
Visibility = On
Transparency = 0.5
END
.e
CFX> quit
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 18: Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
By default, CFD-Post does not modify the variable names in the Fluent file. If you want to use all of the
embedded CFD-Post macros and calculation options, you need to convert variable names to CFX types.
You can convert the variable names to CFX variable names by selecting the Translate variable names
to CFX-Solver style names check box in the Edit > Options > Files menu. Translation is carried out
according to the tables that follow, which list the Fluent field variables and gives the equivalent ANSYS
CFX variable, where one exists. The variables are defined in Alphabetical Listing of Field Variables and
Their Definitions in the Fluent User's Guide.
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Fluent Variable CFX Variable
Density... Density Density
Density All
Tangential Velocity
Axial Velocity (2da or 3d) Velocity Axial
Radial Velocity Velocity Radial
Stream Function (2d) Stream Function
Tangential Velocity Velocity Circumferential
Mach Number (id) Mach Number
Relative Velocity Magnitude Velocity Magnitude
Relative Axial Velocity (2da) Velocity Axial
Relative Radial Velocity (2da) Velocity Radial
Relative Swirl Velocity (2dasw, bnv) Velocity Circumferential
Mach Number
Mesh X-Velocity (nv) Mesh Velocity u
Mesh Y-Velocity (nv) Mesh Velocity v
Mesh Z-Velocity (3d, nv) Mesh Velocity w
Velocity Angle Velocity Angle
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Fluent Variable CFX Variable
Swirl Pull Velocity (melt (if calculated), Pull Velocity Circumferentiala
2dasw)
a
CFD-Post naming convention
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Fluent Variable CFX Variable
Premixed Progress Variable (pmx or ppmx; nv) Reaction Progress
Combustion... Damkohler Number (pmx or ppmx) Damkohler Numbera
Stretch Factor (pmx or ppmx) Stretch Factora
Turbulent Flame Speed (pmx or ppmx) Turbulent Flame Speeda
Static Temperature (pmx or ppmx) Temperature
Product Formation Rate (pmx or ppmx) Product Formation Ratea
Laminar Flame Speed (pmx or ppmx) Laminar Flame Speeda
Critical Strain Rate (pmx or ppmx) Critical Strain Ratea
a
Adiabatic Flame Temperature (pmx or Adiabatic Flame Temperature
ppmx)
Unburnt Fuel Mass Fraction (pmx or ppmx) Unburnt Fuel Mass Fractiona
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Table 18.7: Phases, Discrete Phase Model, Granular Pressure, and Granular Temperature Categories
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Fluent Variable CFX Variable
DPM Emission Particle Radiative Emission
DPM Scattering Particle Radiative Scattering
DPM Burnout Particle Burnout
DPM Evaporation/Devolatilization Particle Evaporation-Devolatilization
DPM Concentration Particle Mass Concentration
DPM Turbulent Kinetic Energy Source Particle Turbulent Kinetic Energy Source
DPM Turbulent Dissipation Source Particle Turbulent Dissipation Source
DPM Species-n Concentration <Species-n>.Particle Mass Concentration
DPM Species-n Source (dpm, sp, e) <Species-n>.Particle Mass Source
Granular Granular Pressure (emm, gran) <phase>.Granular Pressurea
Pressure...
Granular Granular Temperature (emm, gran) <phase>.Granular Temperature
Temperature...
Table 18.8: Properties, Wall Fluxes, User Defined Scalars, and User Defined Memory Categories
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Fluent Variable CFX Variable
Angular Coordinate (3d, nv) Angular Coordinate
Abs. Angular Coordinate (3d, nv) Absolute Angular Coordinate
Radial Coordinate (nv) Radial Angular Coordinate
Face Area Magnitude Face Area Magnitude
X Face Area Face Area X
Y Face Area Face Area Y
Z Face Area (3d) Face Area Z
Cell Equiangle Skew Cell Equiangle Skew
Cell Equivolume Skew Cell Equivolume Skew
Cell Volume Cell Volume
2D Cell Volume (2da) 2d Cell Volume
Cell Wall Distance Cell Wall Distance
Face Handedness Face Handedness
Face Squish Index Face Squish Index
Cell Squish Index Cell Squish Index
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Fluent Variable CFX Variable
dRadial-Velocity/dy (2da) dRadial-Velocity-dy
dSwirl-Velocity/dy (2dasw) dCircumferential-Velocity-dy
d species-n/dy (cpl, sp) d<Species-n>-dy
dX-Velocity/dz (3d) du-Velocity-dz
dY-Velocity/dz (3d) dv-Velocity-dz
dZ-Velocity/dz (3d) dw-Velocity-dz
d species-n/dz (cpl, sp, 3d) d<Species-n>-dz
dOmega/dx (2dasw) dOmega-dx
dOmega/dy (2dasw) dOmega-dy
dT/dx dT/dx
dT/dy dT/dy
dT/dz dT/dz
dp-dX (seg) dp-dX
dp-dY (seg) dp-dY
dp-dZ (seg, 3d) dp-dZ
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
Fluent Field Variables Listed by Category
Note
Release 18.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.